JP6909244B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a gaming ball, which is a gaming medium, is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and when the gaming ball wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Further, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a winning ball when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If this is done, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are awarded to the large prize openings, the large prize openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round.
As such a pachinko gaming machine, conventionally, a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set set value. there were.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be appropriately executed. ..

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a setting confirmation operation.

(A) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting value changing process) capable of setting a setting value related to a probability of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). ,
A setting permission control means that can control the setting permission state for permitting the setting of the setting value, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting permission state, and
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process) that can control the setting value set by the setting means to a setting confirmation state that can be confirmed, and
An interrupt process execution means that executes an interrupt process that can execute a game-related process,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the game medium passing through the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
A normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring a normal variable display period for variable display of normal identification information, and
A special variable display means (for example, a CPU 103 that clocks with a special figure fluctuation time timer) capable of variablely displaying special identification information (for example, a special symbol) and displaying a variable display result,
A special variable display timing means (for example, CPU 103) that measures a special variable display period for variable display of special identification information, and
It is equipped with an external output means capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall).
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing is permitted.
When the setting confirmation state ends, the interrupt process is permitted, and after the interrupt process is permitted, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped when the normal variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted (for example, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the normal symbol). Stops the timekeeping of the normal map fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped when the special variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the special variable display period is restarted (for example, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the special symbol). Stops the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the mode of the special variable display means is different from the variable display result (in the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). Start lighting all segments that make up),
The external output means
Wherein Ri can be output der the specific signal when it is controlled to set confirmation state (e.g., security signal is output when it is controlled to set confirmation state),
The specific signal can be output when controlled to the setting permission state, and the specific signal can be output.
The specific information is deleted based on the end of the control of the setting permission state.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without ending the control of the setting permission state.
An error notification means capable of executing error notification based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed is provided.
The error notification means notifies the error when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means and is not controlled to the setting permission state when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Is feasible and
When the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the error notification is not executed when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means and is controlled to the setting permission state.
The external output means can output the specific signal when the error notification is being executed.
It is characterized by that. According to this feature, the setting confirmation work can be preferably executed when the setting confirmation is desired to be performed immediately.
The gaming machine of means C1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Specific identification information variable display means (variable display of specific identification information) that can execute variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. Game control microcomputer 100) and
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) according to the game state (non-KT state, KT state). A decorative identification information variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) corresponding to either one, and
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol). ) Is controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display of the specific identification information (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A1) to (A4), the first corresponding the decorative symbol. When the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a "big hit"), a notification effect for notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4)), a combination of decorative symbols that become a big hit. (In this example, the effect of stopping and displaying "222")) is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information. When the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4), the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit". (When), the character "FEVER" is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1)), the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit is not executed. Is displayed to notify the occurrence of a big hit),
Moreover,
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is the part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decorative identification information, the notification effect is not executed, and the specific identification information is based on the variable display of any of the specific identification information. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding whether the control is in an advantageous state. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
Means C1 gaming machine
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information. When the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A1) to (A4), the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is "big hit". (When), a movable body that can perform a movable body effect (a movable body motion effect that moves the movable body 06TM100 from an inclined position to an upright position as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A3)). Equipped with effect execution means (effect control CPU 120)
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information. When the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4), the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit". (When), the movable body effect effect is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B3) and (B4), the movable body motion effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player paying attention to the variable display of the decoration identification information executes the movable body effect at an unexpected irregular timing, so that the movable body is controlled at a high rate of advantageous state. Prevents the decline in the interest of body production.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
After the first start condition is satisfied (starting prize for the winning ball device 6A occurs), the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved storage number is not 0). Execute (variable display) and
After the second start condition is satisfied (starting prize for the variable winning ball device 6B occurs), the second starting condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol The second specific identification information (second special symbol) is variable based on the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the above and the second reserved memory number is not 0). Execute display (variable display) and
It is possible to control a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state).
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the first 2 It is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variation display result of the special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the first special symbol is displayed. It is controlled to the jackpot game state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when the special state (small hit game state) is controlled (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process). When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the first 2 In the special symbol normal processing, when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variation display of the second special symbol is not started).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state because the start condition cannot be satisfied when the control is in the advantageous state. Further, since the start condition cannot be satisfied when the game is controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Means C3 gaming machine
A gaming machine characterized in that it can be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state different from the advantageous state as an advantageous gaming state for the player.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C4.
Regardless of the game state, the variable display of the first special identification information, which is less visible than the decorative identification information (decorative symbol), is executed in response to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol), and decorative identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is characterized by being able to execute variable display of the second special identification information, which is less visible than information (decorative symbol) (variable display of the second small symbol can be executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol). A game machine to be.
According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the status of the variable display of the specific identification information by checking the status of the variable display of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C5.
A game control unit (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), and
When the decorative identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the decorative identification information variable display (decorative pattern variable display) are not executed, special effects (first demo display, second demo display) are executed. Including an effect control unit (effect control board 12) having a possible special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120),
In the specific identification information variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (starting prize is generated for the winning ball device 6A) (FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol is controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0). The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on the above, and the second start condition is set after the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B occurs). (As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled and the second special symbol is established. The variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0).
In the game control unit (main board 11), the first starting condition is not satisfied (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A has not occurred), and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. The first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the second start condition are not satisfied (variable prize). The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning prize for the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). And (second customer waiting demo display specification command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means according to the first gaming state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), it is in a non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702). 1 Demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second gaming state when the second special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), it is in the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), and is second. Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. ..

The gaming machine of means C7 is
Means C6 gaming machine
While executing the first special effect (first demo display), the start condition corresponding to the first specific identification information (first special symbol) was satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first In the special symbol normal processing, the first is not controlled by either the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, and the first reserved storage number is not 0). When the special effect is finished (as shown in FIGS. 9-38, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is finished (step 026IWS4716)).
While executing the second special effect (second demo display), the start condition corresponding to the second specific identification information (second special symbol) was satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, the second In the special symbol normal processing, the second is not controlled by either the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, and the second reserved storage number is not 0). When the special effect is terminated (as shown in FIGS. 9-39, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is performed (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C7.
In the specific identification information variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (starting prize is generated for the winning ball device 6A) (FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol is controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0). The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on the above, and the second start condition is set after the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B occurs). (As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled and the second special symbol is established. The variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0).
During the execution of the special effect (first demo display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A). 1 The number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of the start condition can be displayed in the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of 1st reserved storages is 4, 4 in the 1st reserved display area 06TM011. The first hold display 06TM010 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (first demo display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the second special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the above, the first start condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the first start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the winning ball device 6A). The reserved storage number can be displayed in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first reserved storage number is 1, the first reserved storage number is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
When the second start condition can be satisfied during the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). The number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition can be displayed in the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of second reserved storages is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 can be displayed. 4 second hold display 06TM020 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the first special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the above, the second start condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the second start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the variable winning ball device 6B). The reserved storage number can be displayed in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the second reserved storage number is 0, the second reserved storage number is displayed. "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by displaying the reserved storage number in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect, the reserved storage number can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C8.
Variable display of one of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) (first variable display of the specific identification information) It is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") during the variable display of the special symbol). A variable display interrupting means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that interrupts the variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to a special state (small hit game state).
An end effect (an effect executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command) accompanying the end of the special state (small hit game state), for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), is open. After closing the special variable winning ball device 17, the character and "30pt" are displayed on the image display device 5.
GET! It is provided with an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect (such as an effect of displaying the characters).
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) than the special state (second KT state), which is frequently controlled by the special state (small hit game state). As described above, after closing the open special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four pieces displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021. The execution period of the second hold display 06TM020 (effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020) is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while FIG. 10-11. As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for suspending the variable display of one specific identification information in the non-special state, and it corresponds to the variable display status of one specific effect information and the other specific identification information. Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086690 (FIG. 22), a gaming machine that performs demo display (special effect) according to the execution status of variable display has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), there is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are variably displayed at the same time. Proposed. For a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of two specific identification information in parallel as described in JP-A-2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), JP-A-2017-086690 (Fig. 22) When the above-described configuration for executing the special effect is applied, it is necessary to appropriately control the effect related to the special effect. The inventions according to the means A1 to the means A9 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and appropriately control the effect related to the special effect in the gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the two specific identification information in parallel. There is.

The gaming machine of means A1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
After the first start condition (starting prize for the winning ball device 6A occurs) is satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved storage number is not 0). Is executed, and the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition (starting prize for the variable winning ball device 6B is generated) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing). , The second specific identification information (second) based on the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled and the second reserved storage number is not 0). The variable display of the special symbol) is executed, and the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. Executable specific identification information variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control) and
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) according to the game state (non-KT state, KT state). A decorative identification information variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) corresponding to either one, and
A special effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute a special effect (first demo display, second demo display) when the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) is not executed. Prepare,
When the first start condition and the second start condition can be satisfied during the execution of the special effect (first demo display, second demo display), any of the first start condition and the second start condition. It is possible to end the special effect based on the establishment of either one (as shown in FIGS. 9-38, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first 1 When the demo display ends (step 026IWS4716) and the variable display of the second special symbol starts (YES in step 026IWS4814) as shown in FIG. 9-39, the second demo display ends (step 026IWS4816). ),
While the special effect (first demo display, second demo display) is being executed, the first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process). In, the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of (YES in step S06TM1000B), regardless of whether or not either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Since the special effect can be continued (as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), it is controlled to the small hit game state (NO). Step 026IWS4715 NO), the first demo display did not end, and as shown in FIG. 9-39, the variation display of the second special symbol did not start (NO in step 026IWS4814), and it was controlled to the small hit game state. (YES in step 026IWS4815), so the second demo display does not end)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
The decorative identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) corresponds to variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to the first gaming state (non-KT state). It is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol), and when the second game state (KT state) is controlled, the variable display of the second specific identification information (the second special symbol) is possible. Variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative design) can be executed in response to variable display).
When the first game state (non-KT state) is controlled during the execution of the special effect (first demo display), the first start condition is set when the first start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is terminated in response to the establishment (starting prize for the winning ball device 6A occurs) (as shown in FIGS. 9-38, when the starting winning for the winning ball device 6A occurs), the first special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4714) and the first demo display ends (step 026IWS4716)), while the special effect is continued when the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIGS. 9-38). In Since it is not controlled (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display does not end (step 026IWS4716).
When the second game state (KT state) is controlled during the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition is satisfied when the second start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is terminated in response to the above (as shown in FIGS. 9-39, when the start winning prize for the variable winning ball device 6B occurs, the variation display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814). , The second demo display ends (step 026IWS4816). On the other hand, when the first start condition is satisfied, the special effect is continued (as shown in FIGS. 9-39, a start prize is generated in the prize ball device 6A. Then, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, but the variation display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and since it is controlled to the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second The demo display does not end (step 026IWS4816),
While the special effect (first demo display, second demo display) is being executed, the first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process). In, the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result (YES in step S06TM1000B), the special effect is continued regardless of whether or not the first starting condition is satisfied (Fig. 9-38). As shown, since the variation display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714) and is controlled to the small hit game state (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not ended and the first demo display is not terminated. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the variation display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814) and is controlled to the small hit game state (YES in step 026IWS4815), so the second demo display is finished. The special effect is continued regardless of whether or not the second starting condition is satisfied (as shown in FIGS. 9-38, when the starting winning prize for the variable winning ball device 6B occurs, the first special symbol is displayed. Since the fluctuation display of the above is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714) and is controlled to the small hit game state (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not ended, and as shown in FIG. 9-39. , The variation display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and it is controlled to the small hit game state (YES in step 026IWS4815), so the second demo display is not ended).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2.
It is possible to control a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state).
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the first 2 It is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variation display result of the special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the first special symbol is displayed. It is controlled to the jackpot game state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when the special state (small hit game state) is controlled (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process). When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the first 2 In the special symbol normal processing, when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variation display of the second special symbol is not started).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state because the start condition cannot be satisfied when the control is in the advantageous state. Further, since the start condition cannot be satisfied when the game is controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Means A3 gaming machine
A gaming machine characterized in that it can be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state different from the advantageous state as an advantageous gaming state for the player.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
Regardless of the game state, the variable display of the first special identification information, which is less visible than the decorative identification information (decorative symbol), is executed in response to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol), and decorative identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is characterized by being able to execute variable display of the second special identification information, which is less visible than information (decorative symbol) (variable display of the second small symbol can be executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol). A game machine to be.
According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the status of the variable display of the specific identification information by checking the status of the variable display of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
A game control unit (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), and
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) having the decorative identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is included.
In the game control unit (main board 11), the first starting condition is not satisfied (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A has not occurred), and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. The first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the second start condition are not satisfied (variable prize). The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning prize for the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (Second customer waiting demo display specification command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means according to the first gaming state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), it is in a non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702). 1 Demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second gaming state when the second special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), it is in the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), and is second. Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. ..

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Means A6 gaming machine
While the first special effect (first demo display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol The first special effect is terminated according to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved storage number is not 0) (Fig. 9-38). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)).
While the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol The second special effect is terminated according to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the second reserved storage number is not 0) (FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
During the execution of the special effect (first demo display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A). 1 The number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of the start condition can be displayed in the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of 1st reserved storages is 4, 4 in the 1st reserved display area 06TM011. The first hold display 06TM010 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (first demo display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the second special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the above, the first start condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the first start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the winning ball device 6A). The reserved storage number can be displayed in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first reserved storage number is 1, the first reserved storage number is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
When the second start condition can be satisfied during the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). The number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition can be displayed in the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of second reserved storages is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 can be displayed. 4 second hold display 06TM020 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the first special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the above, the second start condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the second start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the variable winning ball device 6B). The reserved storage number can be displayed in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the second reserved storage number is 0, the second reserved storage number is displayed. "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by displaying the reserved storage number in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect, the reserved storage number can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
Variable display of one of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) (first variable display of the specific identification information) It is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") during the variable display of the special symbol). A variable display interrupting means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that interrupts the variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to a special state (small hit game state).
An end effect (an effect executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command) accompanying the end of the special state (small hit game state), for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), is open. After closing the special variable winning ball device 17, the character and "30pt" are displayed on the image display device 5.
GET! It is provided with an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect (such as an effect of displaying the characters).
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) than the special state (second KT state), which is frequently controlled by the special state (small hit game state). As described above, after closing the open special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four pieces displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021. The execution period of the second hold display 06TM020 (effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020) is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while FIG. 10-11. As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for suspending the variable display of one specific identification information in the non-special state, and it corresponds to the variable display status of one specific effect information and the other specific identification information. Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086690 (FIG. 22), a gaming machine that performs demo display (special effect) according to the execution status of variable display has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), there is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are variably displayed at the same time. Proposed. For a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of two specific identification information in parallel as described in JP-A-2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), JP-A-2017-086690 (Fig. 22) When the above-described configuration for executing the special effect is applied, it is necessary to appropriately control the effect related to the special effect. The inventions according to the means B1 to the means B9 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and appropriately control the effect related to the special effect in the gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the two specific identification information in parallel. There is.

The gaming machine of means B1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
After the first start condition (starting prize for the winning ball device 6A occurs) is satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved storage number is not 0). Is executed, and the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition (starting prize for the variable winning ball device 6B is generated) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing). , The second specific identification information (second) based on the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled and the second reserved storage number is not 0). The variable display of the special symbol) is executed, and the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. Executable specific identification information variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control) and
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) according to the game state (non-KT state, KT state). A decorative identification information variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) corresponding to either one, and
A special effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute a special effect (first demo display, second demo display) when the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) is not executed. Prepare,
While the special effect (first demo display, second demo display) is being executed, the first start condition and the first start condition and the first start condition are irrespective of whether or not the first start condition and the second start condition can be satisfied. 2 The special effect is terminated based on the satisfaction of any one of the starting conditions (as shown in FIG. 10-21, a starting winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A, and the first reserved memory number is 1. When (NO in step S06TM1400), the first demo display is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 10-22, a start winning prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B, and when the second reserved storage number becomes 1 (step S06TM1500). NO), end the second demo display)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control according to the establishment status of the start condition of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
The decorative identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) corresponds to variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to the first gaming state (non-KT state). It is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol), and when the second game state (KT state) is controlled, the variable display of the second specific identification information (the second special symbol) is possible. Variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative design) can be executed in response to variable display).
While the special effect (first demo display, second demo display) is being executed, the first start condition or the second start condition can be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process). Therefore, the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, and the first reserved memory number is not 0, or as shown in FIG. 10-4, the second When the special symbol normal processing is not controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol and the second reserved storage number is not 0), the first start condition is satisfied. The special effect is terminated according to the establishment (starting prize for the winning ball device 6A occurs) (as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the starting winning for the winning ball device 6A occurs, the first special symbol changes. The display is started (YES in 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended), and the special effect is ended according to the establishment of the second starting condition (as shown in FIG. 10-22, the variable winning ball device 6B. When the start prize is generated, the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in 026IWS4814), and the second demo display is terminated).
While the special effect (first demo display, second demo display) is being executed, the first start condition or the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process). Then, the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, or as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol is the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When the winning game state is controlled), the special effect is terminated according to the establishment of the first starting condition (as shown in FIG. 10-21, a starting prize is generated for the winning ball device 6A). However, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), but the first reserved memory number becomes 1 (NO in step S06TM1400), the first demo display is terminated), and the second start condition is satisfied. The special effect is terminated according to the establishment (as shown in FIG. 10-22, even if a start winning prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B, the variation display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814). ), The number of second reserved storage becomes 1 (NO in step S06TM1500), and the second demo display is terminated).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control according to the establishment status of the start condition of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2.
It is possible to control a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state).
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the first 2 It is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variation display result of the special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the first special symbol is displayed. It is controlled to the jackpot game state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when the special state (small hit game state) is controlled (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process). When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the first 2 In the special symbol normal processing, when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variation display of the second special symbol is not started).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state because the start condition cannot be satisfied when the control is in the advantageous state. Further, since the start condition cannot be satisfied when the game is controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
It is a gaming machine of means B3,
A gaming machine characterized in that it can be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state different from the advantageous state as an advantageous gaming state for the player.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
Regardless of the game state, the variable display of the first special identification information, which is less visible than the decorative identification information (decorative symbol), is executed in response to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol), and decorative identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is characterized by being able to execute variable display of the second special identification information, which is less visible than information (decorative symbol) (variable display of the second small symbol can be executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol). A game machine to be.
According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the status of the variable display of the specific identification information by checking the status of the variable display of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
A game control unit (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), and
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) having the decorative identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is included.
In the game control unit (main board 11), the first starting condition is not satisfied (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A has not occurred), and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. The first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the second start condition are not satisfied (variable prize). The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning prize for the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (Second customer waiting demo display specification command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means according to the first gaming state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), it is in a non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702). 1 Demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second gaming state when the second special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), it is in the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), and is second. Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. ..

The gaming machine of means B7 is
It is a gaming machine of means B6,
While the first special effect (first demo display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol The first special effect is terminated according to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved storage number is not 0) (Fig. 9-38). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)).
While the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol The second special effect is terminated according to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the second reserved storage number is not 0) (FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
During the execution of the special effect (first demo display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A). 1 The number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of the start condition can be displayed in the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of 1st reserved storages is 4, 4 in the 1st reserved display area 06TM011. The first hold display 06TM010 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (first demo display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the second special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the above, the first start condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the first start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the winning ball device 6A). The reserved storage number can be displayed in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first reserved storage number is 1, the first reserved storage number is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
When the second start condition can be satisfied during the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). The number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition can be displayed in the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of second reserved storages is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 can be displayed. 4 second hold display 06TM020 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the first special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the above, the second start condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the second start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the variable winning ball device 6B). The reserved storage number can be displayed in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the second reserved storage number is 0, the second reserved storage number is displayed. "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by displaying the reserved storage number in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect, the reserved storage number can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
Variable display of one of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) (first variable display of the specific identification information) It is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") during the variable display of the special symbol). A variable display interrupting means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that interrupts the variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to a special state (small hit game state).
An end effect (an effect executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command) accompanying the end of the special state (small hit game state), for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), is open. After closing the special variable winning ball device 17, the character and "30pt" are displayed on the image display device 5.
GET! It is provided with an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect (such as an effect of displaying the characters).
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) than the special state (second KT state), which is frequently controlled by the special state (small hit game state). As described above, after closing the open special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four pieces displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021. The execution period of the second hold display 06TM020 (effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020) is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while FIG. 10-11. As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for suspending the variable display of one specific identification information in the non-special state, and it corresponds to the variable display status of one specific effect information and the other specific identification information. Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187523 (FIG. 73), when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the power is being restored based on the image control unit receiving the power restoration designation command. A gaming machine that performs a power restoration effect to notify that the above is the case has been proposed. In the gaming machine shown in JP-A-2016-187523 (FIG. 73), when recovering from a power failure, it is necessary to provide appropriate notification according to the variable display status of the specific identification information when the power failure occurs. be. The inventions according to the means D1 to the means D10 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies according to the variable display status of the specific identification information when a power failure occurs. It is in.

The gaming machine of means D1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Specific identification information variable display means (variable display of specific identification information) that can execute variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. A game control means (main board 11) having a game control microcomputer 100),
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) according to the game state (non-KT state, KT state). The effect control means (effect control board 12) having the decorative identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) corresponding to any one of them. Prepare,
The game control means (main board 11) has a first information (first customer waiting demo display designation command, display corresponding to the first special symbol) regarding variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Result specification command, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) and second information (second customer waiting demo display specification command, second) regarding variable display of the second specific identification information (variation display of the second special symbol) Display result specification command corresponding to the special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol) and game state information related to the game state (low accuracy / non-KT background specification command, low accuracy / first KT background specification command, high accuracy / 1st KT background designation command, high accuracy / 2nd KT background designation command) can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control board 12).
When the effect control means (effect control board 12) recovers from a power failure, the effect control means (effect control board 12) can execute recovery notification in different modes depending on the first information, the second information, and the game state information. (As shown in "Situation 2" of FIG. 10-15, the game state is low probability / non-KT state based on the reception of the low probability / non-KT background designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command. Since it is (normal state), it is possible to identify that the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the main symbol, is executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the sub symbol, is not executed. The words "Power off and recovering" are displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5, and as shown in "Situation 4" of FIG. 10-15, the low accuracy / non-KT background specification command and the first customer waiting demo display specification command Is received, the game state is the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the variation display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol is not executed, and the second special symbol which is the sub symbol is not executed. Since it is possible to identify that the variable display of is being executed, the word "Recovering" is displayed in the display range (upper right part of the screen) of the second small symbol, which is a sub symbol, and each of the other parts is displayed. Directing design (decorative design and 1st small design) and background image (sunny image) are displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information in parallel, it is possible to appropriately notify the power failure recovery.

The gaming machine of means D2 is
Means D1 gaming machine
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol). ) Is supported, and variable display of special identification information (variable display of the first small symbol, variable display of the second small symbol), which is less visible than decorative identification information, can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by being.
According to such a configuration, the player can confirm the status of the variable display of the specific identification information by checking the status of the variable display of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2.
When the effect control means (effect control CPU 120) recovers from the power failure,
The first information (first customer waiting demo display designation command, display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) and the second information (second customer waiting demo display designation). Of the commands, the display result specification command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol), the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol). (For example, the information about (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol) (the first customer waiting demo display designation command, the display result specification command corresponding to the first special symbol, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) is received. When not, the recovery notification of the first aspect (recovery screen shown in FIG. 10-16 (B) in which the characters "power failure is being recovered" is displayed on the entire screen) is executed.
Of the first information and the second information, information related to variable display of specific identification information (for example, variable display of a second special symbol) that does not correspond to variable display of decorative identification information (second customer waiting demo display designation command, When the display result specification command corresponding to the second special symbol and the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol are not received, the recovery notification of the second mode (sub-symbols shown in FIG. 10-16 (A)) is received. The word "Recovering" is displayed in the display range (upper right part of the screen) of the 2nd small symbol corresponding to, and each production symbol (decorative symbol and 1st small symbol) and background image (sunny image) are displayed in other parts. ) Is displayed, and then the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information (second customer waiting demo display specification command, display result corresponding to the second special symbol). When the designated command and the variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol are received, the recovery notification of the second mode is terminated (each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background. Only the image (sunny image) is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the recovery process is notified in an appropriate manner according to the variable display status of the specific identification information corresponding to the decoration identification information and the variable display status of the specific identification information not corresponding to the decoration identification information. Is possible.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D3.
After the first start condition is satisfied (starting prize for the winning ball device 6A occurs), the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved storage number is not 0). Execute (variable display) and
After the second start condition is satisfied (starting prize for the variable winning ball device 6B occurs), the second starting condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol The second specific identification information (second special symbol) is variable based on the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the above and the second reserved memory number is not 0). Execute display (variable display) and
It is possible to control a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state).
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the first 2 It is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variation display result of the special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the first special symbol is displayed. It is controlled to the jackpot game state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when the special state (small hit game state) is controlled (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process). When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the first 2 In the special symbol normal processing, when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variation display of the second special symbol is not started).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state because the start condition cannot be satisfied when the control is in the advantageous state. Further, since the start condition cannot be satisfied when the game is controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means D5 is
Means D4 gaming machine
A gaming machine characterized in that it can be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state different from the advantageous state as an advantageous gaming state for the player.

The gaming machine of means D6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D5.
Regardless of the game state, the variable display of the first special identification information, which is less visible than the decorative identification information (decorative symbol), is executed in response to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol), and decorative identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is characterized by being able to execute variable display of the second special identification information, which is less visible than information (decorative symbol) (variable display of the second small symbol can be executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol). A game machine to be.
According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the status of the variable display of the specific identification information by checking the status of the variable display of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means D7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D6.
A game control unit (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), and
When the decorative identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the decorative identification information variable display (decorative pattern variable display) are not executed, special effects (first demo display, second demo display) are executed. Including an effect control unit (effect control board 12) having a possible special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120),
In the specific identification information variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (starting prize is generated for the winning ball device 6A) (FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol is controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0). The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on the above, and the second start condition is set after the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B occurs). (As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled and the second special symbol is established. The variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0).
In the game control unit (main board 11), the first starting condition is not satisfied (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A has not occurred), and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. The first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the second start condition are not satisfied (variable prize). The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning prize for the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (Second customer waiting demo display specification command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means according to the first gaming state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), it is in a non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702). 1 Demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second gaming state when the second special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), it is in the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), and is second. Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. ..

The gaming machine of means D8
It is a gaming machine of means D7,
While the first special effect (first demo display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the second special symbol The first special effect is terminated according to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved storage number is not 0) (Fig. 9-38). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)).
While the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol The second special effect is terminated according to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the second reserved storage number is not 0) (FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means D9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D8.
In the specific identification information variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (starting prize is generated for the winning ball device 6A) (FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol is controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0). The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on the above, and the second start condition is set after the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B occurs). (As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled and the second special symbol is established. The variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0).
During the execution of the special effect (first demo display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A). 1 The number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of the start condition can be displayed in the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of 1st reserved storages is 4, 4 in the 1st reserved display area 06TM011. The first hold display 06TM010 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (first demo display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the second special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the above, the first start condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the first start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the winning ball device 6A). The reserved storage number can be displayed in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first reserved storage number is 1, the first reserved storage number is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
When the second start condition can be satisfied during the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). The number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition can be displayed in the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of second reserved storages is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 can be displayed. 4 second hold display 06TM020 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, the variation display result of the first special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the above, the second start condition is satisfied according to the establishment of the second start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the variable winning ball device 6B). The reserved storage number can be displayed in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the second reserved storage number is 0, the second reserved storage number is displayed. "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by displaying the reserved storage number in the second aspect, which is less visible than the first aspect, the reserved storage number can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means D10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D9.
Variable display of one of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) (first variable display of the specific identification information) It is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") during the variable display of the special symbol). A variable display interrupting means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that interrupts the variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to a special state (small hit game state).
An end effect (an effect executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command) accompanying the end of the special state (small hit game state), for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), is open. After closing the special variable winning ball device 17, the character and "30pt" are displayed on the image display device 5.
GET! It is provided with an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect (such as an effect of displaying the characters).
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) than the special state (second KT state), which is frequently controlled by the special state (small hit game state). As described above, after closing the open special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four pieces displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021. The execution period of the second hold display 06TM020 (effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020) is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while FIG. 10-11. As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for suspending the variable display of one specific identification information in the non-special state, and it corresponds to the variable display status of one specific effect information and the other specific identification information. Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, it is possible to execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and a game medium in which the variable means moves on a specific route is provided so as to be able to enter the game. Some are configured to be feasible for specific notifications to facilitate the launch of the medium. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127 (paragraph 0044) describes that a second game state display unit is provided that lights up when a big hit or a small hit occurs to notify that it is a right-handed hit. ing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127 (paragraph 0044), there is no distinction between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Specific notification is being executed. Therefore, it is not always possible to give appropriate notification about the promotion of launching the game medium. Therefore, an object of the invention according to the means E1 to the means E7 is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the promotion of launching the gaming medium.

(Means E1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) has entered the first starting region (for example, the first starting winning opening). The variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) can be executed based on the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol), and the second identification information (for example, the second start winning opening) is identified based on the entry of the game medium into the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening). Steps S110A to S113A and second special symbol of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display of the information (for example, the second special symbol)). A portion of the process process (step S25B) that executes the processes corresponding to steps S110A to S113A), a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state), and a second state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter. For the player, after the variable means that can be changed to a state (for example, a closed state) (for example, a special variable winning ball device 17) and the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information are executed. A state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of controlling either an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) or a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). In 100, the first special symbol process process (step S25A), steps S115A to S121A, and the second special symbol process process (step S25B), the portion corresponding to steps S115A to S121A) and the special state are controlled. Steps S119A to S121A of the variable means control means (for example, the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100) and the second special symbol process process (step) that control the variable means to the first state when the variable means is in the game control device 100. The first start area moves on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) among the movement paths on which the game medium can move. The game medium is provided so as to be able to enter, and the variable means is provided so that the game medium moving on a specific route (for example, the right region of the game area) can enter, and the game medium is launched into the specific route. In a specific notification executing means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)) for promoting the above. Step 026 A part for executing IWS2012A, S2021B, S2027B. For example, a portion for executing steps 026IWS624 and S634 in the effect control CPU 120. ), And the specific notification execution means does not execute the specific notification when the first identification information is controlled to a special state after the variable display is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is Y in step 026IWS2024A). At the time, the same processing as in step 026IWS2027B is not executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the same processing as in step 026IWS624 when it is Y in step 026IWS629. See FIG. 9-48 (3). do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify about the promotion of launching the game medium.

(Means E2) In means E1, information regarding a first reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding variable display of first identification information as hold storage and information regarding variable display of second identification information. The state control means is provided with a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store the first identification information as a hold storage, and the state control means is a display result of a variable display of the first identification information or a variable display of the second identification information. When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of, it is possible to control the special state (for example, a small hit game state), and the display result of the variable display of the second identification information. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has steps 026IWS2208A, S2213A, SS14A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B, S2213B, SS14B. , S2219B, S2220B), the variable display executing means, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, as a display result of one of the variable displays. Based on the derivation display of the special display result, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the other variable display (for example, for effect control). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the CPU 120 may be configured to perform control to confirm and display the out-of-order symbol in step 026IWS9703). According to such a configuration, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

(Means E3) In the means E1 or the means E2, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). , A value-imparting means (for example, payout control) that can give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to a large winning opening). The microcomputer 21TM370) is provided, and the specific notification executing means is the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and 9-48 (2)). (Lighting) and the second specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 026IW007 shown in FIG. 9-48 (1)), which has higher visibility than the first specific notification, can be executed and controlled in an advantageous state. At that time, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2021A, S2022A, S2021B, S2022B, and the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 026IWS624, S634. (See FIG. 9-48 (1).), When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (for example). The game control microcomputer 100 may execute steps 026IWS2027B and S2028B, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute steps 026IWS634 (see FIG. 9-48 (2)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

(Means E4) In any one of the means E1 to the means E3, the state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C), and variable display of the first identification information is executed. When controlled to a special state after being executed, a higher percentage of special states (eg, small) have a lower advantage than when controlled to a special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Controlled to hit A), the specific notification executing means executes the specific notification when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state (FIGS. 9-48 (2), (3). ) May be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

(Means E5) A variable display effect executing means (for example, a variable display effect executing means (for example, variable display of a decorative symbol) capable of executing a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information in any one of the means E1 to the means E4. For example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S171 to S173) is provided, and the variable display effect executing means executes a variable display effect in a common mode when controlled in a special state and when not controlled in a special state. It is possible (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 026IWS920 to S922, and when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed.

(Means E6) In any of the means E1 to the means E5, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. One piece) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the target from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time.

(Means E7) In any one of the means E1 to the means E6, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and a game control means. The game control means is provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that controls the effect based on the information, and the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2021A, S2021B, S2027B), the effect control means includes the specific notification execution means, and the specific notification execution means is specified in response to the notification by the notification means. The notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) may be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 026IWS634 when it is Y in step 026IWS633). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means (1) to (21). Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 in a gaming machine, a judgment random value for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be generated within a predetermined numerical range. Whether to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set in the gaming machine. It is conceivable to determine whether or not the pachinko / pachislot machine has an advantageous state, and to make the number of advantageous state determination values different for each set value set in the gaming machine to make the probability of controlling the advantageous state different. However, when the number of advantageous state judgment values is different for each set value set in the gaming machine in this way, if the advantageous state judgment value is set over a plurality of numerical values, it matches the judgment random value advantageous state judgment value. Since it is necessary to execute the determination as to whether or not to perform the determination a plurality of times, there is a problem that the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state becomes large. Focusing on such problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine described in means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is the part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means is provided.
The advantageous state determining means reads out the set value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41). 207SGS550 process), the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read setting value information, together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical range. , Is set as an advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means matches (for example, 207SG556 of the special symbol normal processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIGS. 11-41). In the process of, the part that sets the display result judgment table according to the set value read in the process of 207SG550)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set every time it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means. It is possible to prevent an inappropriate judgment from being made.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as the determination used set value information (for example, the special symbol normal processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIGS. 11-41). In the processing of 207SGS566, the set value in the processing of 207SGS550 is updated and stored as a judgment used setting value).
A collation that can collate every predetermined period whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means. It is characterized in that the CPU 103 further includes means (for example, in the process of 207SGS552 shown in FIGS. 11-41, a portion for comparing the set value specified in the process of 207SGS550 with the determined used set value).
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set by inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The collation means collates each time it determines whether or not the advantageous state determining means controls the advantageous state for the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, the CPU 103 displays a variable display. The part that executes the processing of 207SGS552 every time it is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the collation is performed every time it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means, it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to the means 3 or the means 4.
When the collation results of the collation means are not the same, the error notification means capable of executing the error notification that the set value information is abnormal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the error notification process (207SGS439)). The image display device 5 is provided with a portion for displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 according to the error) by executing the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the surroundings of the gaming machine recognize that the set value information is abnormal, and it is possible to quickly deal with the abnormal set value information.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine according to the means 5.
The game control means controls the game to an incapable game state when the collation results of the collation means are not the same, and also provides error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. Output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as the comparison result of the 207SGS552, the process proceeds to loop processing. And the part that executes the processing of 207SGS554 and sends an error specification command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the error notification process (207SGS439) from the CPU 103. A part that determines whether or not an error specification command has been received, and when an error specification command is received, executes error notification according to the received error specification command)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to a determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, each time the CPU 103 executes the variable display, the variable display result determination module is used. Use to determine variable display results),
When the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means can be stored as the pending storage means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the start winning determination process in FIGS. 11-39). The part that executes the processing of 207SGS510) and
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, it is possible to predetermine whether or not it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on the hold memory (for example, the CPU 103 wins a prize shown in FIG. 11-40). The part that executes the hourly random value judgment process) and
Further prepare
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to a process for determining whether or not the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins a prize). Even in the random value judgment process, the part that judges the variable display result using the variable display result judgment module)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the pre-determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means, and a storage means (for example, RAM 102).
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Further prepare
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the determination that the special state determination means controls the special state (for example, the special state is based on the fact that the variable display result is a small hit. Figure The part that updates the process flag value to 8 "and controls it to the small hit game state),
The special state determination value is continuously common from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit determination with 32767 as the small hit reference value. The part that is set as the common numerical range of values),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the set value set by the setting means. Each time, the set value information stored in the storage means is read, and a special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information is set (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-17 to 11-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, and the variable special figure. When is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value, but the CPU 103 always reads the set value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display. A part that sets a display result judgment table according to the read set value and judges whether or not the variable display result is a small hit)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature unit, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In some cases, the process of setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information can be shared, so that the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8.
For the set value having the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, a non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, pachinko game If the set value set for machine 1 is 1, the part where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, for the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control only the common numerical range out of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range in an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 9.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is the part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generation means and the advantageous state determination are determined. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since the value is set to be a continuous numerical range, the advantageous state determination means has a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the judgment random value and the advantageous state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control in the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range, it is necessary to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 10.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, the advantageous state can be controlled, and the probability that the advantageous state is determined to be controlled is the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value. Game control that can be controlled to a normal state corresponding to a normal number, which is a number, or a special state corresponding to a special number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the advantageous state. Means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 The range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example,. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, the jackpot numerical range is a portion set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generation means and the advantageous state determination are determined. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since the value is set to be a continuous numerical range, the advantageous state determination means has a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the judgment random value and the advantageous state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control in the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range, it is necessary to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state. Can be done.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes a predetermined reference value, which is advantageous. The state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value, depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 11.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
When the advantageous state determining means determines that the advantageous state is controlled, the advantageous state can be controlled, and when the special state determining means determines that the special state is controlled, the special state can be controlled. A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 11-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in the range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is used as a small hit reference value from 32767 to 33094. The part where the range of is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, they are set to be in a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, FIGS. 11-17 to 11-17). As shown in 11-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to 32767, which is a common value, as the small hit reference value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. Part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are used. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 12.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). And
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 11-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
The special state determination value is continuous from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of the set value set by the setting means so as to be in the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, the small hit The numerical range is different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, 32767 is always used as the small hit reference. The value is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094, and if the variable special figure is the second special symbol, 32767 is always set as a small hit reference value and is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value, the special state judgment value is changed according to the set value. Since the numerical range of can always be specified in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are used. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control to the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 13.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). And
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous determination value and an unfavorable determination value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state is controlled by the special state determining means. The probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, which is the normal state (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) corresponding to the normal number or the advantageous state. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. The part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 11-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example). As shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state. part),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The set value set by the setting means and the same number are set regardless of whether the normal state or the special state is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range from the value (for example,). As shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of 1020 to 1346. In a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1674, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 32767 is always small regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. The hit reference value is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value and the gaming state may be in the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. The part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means always uses the numerical range of the special state determination value as the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value. Since the same numerical range may be specified, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are used. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is a common numerical value of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range, the process of determining whether or not to control the advantageous state is performed. The load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical value of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means. While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times based on the range, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means controls the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the second common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not it is performed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of the means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 14.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set value (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each set value) that is not set by the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set to include the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to the value of 2 to 6 excluding 1.
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, 1020 is used as a jackpot reference value, and 1020 to 1237. The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 11-55 and 11). As shown in −56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probability of being played can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or is advantageous. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and setting it to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common value is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state judgment values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value should be further reduced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 14.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
One of the setting values of the plurality of stages having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player. Setting means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32) and
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
As the advantageous state determination value, a common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) in a predetermined numerical range. A non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values, which is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6), which is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means. ) And is set,
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, 1020 is used as a jackpot reference value, and 1020 to 1237. The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 11-55 and 11). As shown in −56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probability of being played can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or is advantageous. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and setting it to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common value is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state judgment values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value should be further reduced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 16.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). And
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a setting value from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Has been set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 The range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
Regardless of the set value set by the setting means, the same number of the special state determination values is set in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination values (for example, FIGS. 11-53 and 11). As shown in −54, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range including 328 judgment values in succession to the numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value. part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the numerical range of the special state determination value are continuously set, the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generating means is used to determine the advantageous state. Whether or not the value or the value is between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or the value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value When determining to control to an advantageous state or a special state based on (whether or not there is), the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generating means is the minimum value in the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value. Whether or not it is a value between and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, or the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value value generation means is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. By determining whether or not the value is between the value and the maximum value in the numerical range of the special state determination value, it is possible to determine at once whether or not to control the advantageous state or the special state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 17.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 11-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so that it is a continuous second common numerical range.
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, regardless of the set value. 32767 is set as a small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values).
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the setting having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value. The value is set in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit determination is made. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the small hit. The numerical range of the judgment value is small 32767 in a range different from the numerical range of 1020-1346, which is the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. As a hit reference value, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421. Part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are used. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control to the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the first reference value. The advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the first reference value, depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 18.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a setting value from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state is controlled by the special state determining means. The probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, which is the normal state (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) corresponding to the normal number or the advantageous state. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. The part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, when the set value is 2 as shown in FIG. 11-17). Is a portion in which the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in the range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is used as a small hit reference value from 32767 to 33094. The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example). As shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state. part),
The number of the special state determination values is the same as the set value set by the setting means regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example, FIGS. 11-17 to 11-). As shown in 20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of 1020-1346 or 1020-1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In a different range, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 32767 is always set as the small hit reference value of 3267 to 33094 regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. It is set as a continuous numerical range, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, 32767 is always the small hit reference value regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. Part set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421),
The number of the special state determination values is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, the numerical range of the small hit is If the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of the set value to be set, and the variable special figure is the second. If it is a special symbol, regardless of the set value, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value).
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. (Part for determining whether to control), when executing the variable display of the second identification information, whether or not to control the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is determined. Judgment (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit judgment value is small with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The part that determines whether or not to control the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the setting having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value. The value is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, the variable special figure is the first special symbol. In some cases, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655. However, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is different from the numerical range of 1020-1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value in the probabilistic state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. In the range, 32767 is set as a small hit reference value, and when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is set to 32767 to 33421. The part set in the numerical range of)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are used. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control to the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes a predetermined reference value, which is advantageous. The state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value, depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 19.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). And
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set by the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value (value of 2 to 6 excluding 1).
The first common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the jackpot reference value. The part from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 11-55). And as shown in FIGS. 11-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value. Part),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range from the second reference value different from the above (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, the numerical value of the small hit determination value. In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094. If the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, it is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state. In particular, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control the special state can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of the means 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 19.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). And
Setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, 1 to 6) having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, changing the setting value shown by the CPU 103 in FIGS. 11-32). The part that executes the process) and
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 207SG154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
As the advantageous state determination value, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). And the non-common numerical value range that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, 1238 to the value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6)). Numerical range) and is set,
The common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value. The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 11-55 and FIG. As shown in 11-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value. ),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical range from the second reference value different from the above (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is , In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094. If the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, it is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state. In particular, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control the special state can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st small hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 2nd gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how of transition of a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the decorative symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow when it is controlled to each game state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when a start prize is won during the first demo display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each production at the time of starting a prize during the 1st demo display. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when controlled to the small hit game state during the high accuracy / second KT state, and (B) is the small hit during the low accuracy / first KT state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when controlled by a game state. (A1) to (A5) are explanatory views showing specific examples of each effect when the small hit game state is controlled during the high accuracy / second KT state, and (B1) to (B4) are low accuracy. / It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each effect at the time of being controlled to the small hit game state in the 1st KT state. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol becomes a big hit, and (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol becomes a big hit. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect at the time. (A1) to (A4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of each effect when the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol becomes a big hit, and (B1) to (B4) do not correspond to the decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each effect when the 2nd special symbol becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the transmission command according to the situation at the time of power-off recovery. It is a figure which shows the power recovery timing and the power recovery recovery state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each display control at the time of power-off and power-recovery in a low-accuracy / non-KT state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each display control at the time of power-off and power-recovery in a low-accuracy / non-KT state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each display control when the power supply is cut off and the power is restored in the high accuracy / second KT state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each display control when the power supply is cut off and the power is restored in the high accuracy / second KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the demo display control processing. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when a start prize is won during the first demo display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of each effect at the time of starting a prize during the 1st demo display. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift mode of the 1st hold indicator and the 2nd hold indicator. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the value range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probabilistic state. It is a figure which shows the value range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probabilistic state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for effect control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when the power failure during the setting change is restored. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or Shows the change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when recovering from the power failure during the setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in the operation of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of a set value and the confirmation end timing of a set value, and the number of executions of a 1st movable body initialization process and a 2nd movable body initialization process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop end processing in a feature part 10F. It is a figure exemplifying the effect control command in the feature part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing in a feature part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side game stop processing in a feature part 40F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves from the upper left to the lower right and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below the special variable winning ball device 7.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B if the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled to close the large winning opening, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for gaming effects are provided around the gaming area. ..

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". .. In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). By executing the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the first special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. (Details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). By executing the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the second special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. NS. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first start winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S121A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes the process of deciding which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing is completed. do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the second small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, if the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted, the interruption period of the variation display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period and the interruption period of the variation display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol. The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". If the display result is "missing", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process of waiting for passage through the first gate in step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special figure process flag is “4”. In this first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first jackpot release preprocessing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “5”. In this first big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state, etc. It is included. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process during opening of the first jackpot in step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “6”. In this first big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are used. , It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Then, the processing during the opening of the first jackpot is completed.

The first jackpot release post-processing in step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “7”. In this first big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings for ending the game state. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the first special figure Figure The value of the process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the first jackpot ends.

The first jackpot end process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “8”. The first jackpot end process corresponds to a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a process of waiting until the end of the jackpot game state is completed. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting probabilistic change control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot end process ends.

The first small hit release preprocessing in step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “9”. This first small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". .. At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the first small hit in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “10”. In this first small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. It includes processing to determine whether or not it has become. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11", and the process during the opening of the first small hit is completed.

The first small hit end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “11”. The first small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hit end process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not a small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the first small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 8-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 8-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special drawing game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various prize information related to winning is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a function to display. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal are taken into the main board 11 to capture the game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to the 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 to determine the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED9, and decorations. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the gaming board 2. A pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted and received at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the XS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

8-4 (A) to 8-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than when the numbers are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to 8-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 8-5 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 8-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 8-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 8-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 8-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-5 (4), the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), and FIG. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, 6 numbers of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and 6 levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. , The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, for the gaming control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). The set value is changed and / on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). Or it can be confirmed. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) on condition that the setting value has been changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of the setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the data check in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a ringing lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing in steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the set value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 must be turned off and then turned on again. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the process of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the current set value can be displayed (step S21TM4550) and the security signal can be output (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are performed. Corresponding to the end of the control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the output control of the security signal is simplified by sharing the output start control and output end control of the security signal between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control load can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set as a security signal between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the timing is 30 sec after the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clear is performed). When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal will be continued until becomes. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the control is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or is controlled to the setting change mode by executing the initialization process. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that the conversion process may have been executed and controlled to the setting change mode.

A security signal is also output when an error for which the game is stopped, such as a magnetic abnormality, is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unknown whether an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the output period of the security signal is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the set value storage area) is directly imaged on the effect control CPU 120 side. If the display is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 are restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clearing has not been performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if it is controlled to the setting change mode, is the value of the setting value storage area set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or is in the setting change mode? This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds, which corresponds to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but not limited to this form, the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). You may move to the process when the power is cut off and restored.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the interruption occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is performed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (iii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the pachinko / pachislot clerk can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If this is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the condition of the gaming machine, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that received this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value error error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite the fact that there is no such operation, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period during which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 8-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 8-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) common, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is urged to be turned ON when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to ensure that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the set value "0" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the set value storage area. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 8-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, if the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored at the time of power restoration. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the planned setting value may have already been set. In this case, the pachinko / pachislot clerk terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the setting value again. Since the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal gaming process, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 8-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and 8-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is displayed. , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 8-12. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the set value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It becomes a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided for a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to gaming machines (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for an external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of a control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) related to a period during which a specific signal is output is provided.
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). With the end, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
It is a gaming machine of means O1 and
It is provided with an initialization means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) for initializing the game state.
The initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465).
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continuously output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting is changed. When controlled to a mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). The setting change mode is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102) for storing the specific information (setting change flag), and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
In the setting change mode, power is supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change mode is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100), which clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720, and
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute an error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change mode is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied). ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
It is a gaming machine of means P1 and
The setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (at the time of turning on the power, all in steps S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. You can encourage changes.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in the game stop state (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in (), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
With the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change mode is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) Automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the gaming state.
The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
It is a gaming machine of means Q1 and
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). (The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. When controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Automatically control to change setting mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2.
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends).
The setting change mode control means said, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. Exit the setting change mode based on),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is stored. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. Stores the set value before it is set (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched off, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

(Explanation of feature section 026IW)
Next, the feature unit 026IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 026IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 026IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is high (however, it will be described later). (Except in the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 026IW is configured so that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 026IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 9-1 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 9-2 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-1. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. May be configured so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched by making the set values "1" to "6" different.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-2. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "62986/65536" regardless of whether it is a probabilistic state (state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-2), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-1). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. May be configured so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched by making the set values "1" to "6" different.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 9). As shown in -1 and FIG. 9-2, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to loss). For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. good.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (B) and 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the off-probability is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a gaming machine of a type having a setting changing function of 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
9-3 (A) and 9-3 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining one of "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", "9R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in this feature unit 026IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", There is a 9% chance that it will be a "16R probability variation jackpot", a 56% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "16R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, a "9R probability variation jackpot" with a 50% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 35% probability. 2R normal jackpot "is determined.

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "9R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 9 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 026IW, when "16R probability variation jackpot", "9R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (in this example, in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until 30 seconds have passed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls have been won, and up to 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. Is. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 026IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIGS. 9-28).

(Small hit type judgment table)
9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for determining the hit type. , Or a table referenced to determine either "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in this feature unit 026IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be "small hit C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-9), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-10), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 9-11), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
9-5 to 9-7 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature unit 026IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-5 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), it is shown in FIG. 9-5 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol shown for KT is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (C). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 026IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In this feature unit 026IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-6 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when a small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 026IW, as already described, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 9-6 (Fig. 9-6). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined by 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided.

In the feature unit 026IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (F), when it is determined that the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "Chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5, when a big hit is made in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 026IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the gaming machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 9R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-7 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (G), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 to # 21 Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 9R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 9-7 (H). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations shown in) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (H). The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation or later in the high probability / first KT state is out of range, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-7 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 9-8 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-7 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 9-8, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 9-9 to 9-11 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 9-9 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 9-10 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Further, FIG. 9-11 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIGS. 9-9 (2) show the opening patterns. 9-11 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1). As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the missing symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. , In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -11 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A, it is in a state of being able to win. , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed. Is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds. be. Therefore, in the feature unit 026IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2). As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the missing symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. , In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 026IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared with the first KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize to some extent, and various modes can be considered. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three types of small hits A to C is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hit types are configured to be provided. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the feature unit 026IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 026IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 026IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, and FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9 (1) to FIG. As shown in 9-11 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9- The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 11 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 026IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

9-12 and 9-13 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-12, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 9R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 026IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but 15R probability variation jackpot / 9R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined in correspondence with the above, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 has ended. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-12 and 9-13, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it means that the first special symbol display device 4A is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where neither the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 026IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 026IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 026IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 026IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 026IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. In some cases, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high probability / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 026IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69A without performing the processing after step 026IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 026IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 026IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 026IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 026IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 026IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 026IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 026IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 026IWS63A), and step 026IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 026IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 026IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 026IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 026IWS65A). Step 026IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 026IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 026IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 9-4 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 026IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 026IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 026IWS70A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 026IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 026IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 026IWS72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 026IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 026IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75A.

In this feature unit 026IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled and 50 times of fluctuation display is executed. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 026IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 026IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special time saving flag is also reset in steps 026IWS73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

Then, in step 026IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 026IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 026IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 026IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 026IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (Fig. 9-5). (Refer to FIG. 9-7), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 026IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 026IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 026IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-5 is used (step 026IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 026IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 026IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 026IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 026IWS1707A).

FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first determines one of the display result specification commands (display result) based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the decision result of the big hit type if it has not been transmitted yet. (1 designated command, display result 2 designated command, display result 4 designated command, display result 5 designated command) are controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1122A). Step 026IWS1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1124A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1125A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 026IWS1124A), or if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 026IWS1125A), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to (step 026IWS1126A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

By executing the processing of steps 026IWS1124A and S1125A, in this feature unit 026IW, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol The fluctuation display of is forcibly stopped so that a situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1124A. It is controlled so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

If neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N in step 026IWS1124A, N in step 026IWS1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 026IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 026IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is displayed by executing the processes of steps 026IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processes of steps 026IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B are executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 026IWS2014A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 026IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 indicates that the jackpot signal 1 (a signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress) and the jackpot signal 2 (a signal indicating that a consecutive villa is in progress) are output to the outside. The jackpot signal output flag is set (step 026IWS2017A). In this feature unit 026IW, based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step 026IWS2017A, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 If the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 026IWS2018A), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 026IWS2019A), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 026IWS2020A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2021A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2022A).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for the passage of the first gate (step 026IWS2023A).

By executing the processes of steps 026IWS2021A and S2022A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

If the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 026IWS2024A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2025A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first small hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2029A).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2024A), the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2030A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or the launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or the launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first holding memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and at the second start winning opening and the special winning opening, the number exceeds a predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected.

Further, for example, the detection of the game ball at the passing gate 41 does not output an external signal, while the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is configured to output an external signal. You may.

In this feature unit 026IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S114A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 026IWS2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time reduction flag, which indicates that the state is in the probability change state, if set, and the high base number counter. The value of is cleared to 0 (step 026IWS2504A). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a first jackpot start designation command (step 026IWS2505A), and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first jackpot opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2506A).

In this feature unit 026IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 41 The game is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the game ball has passed through and detected by the gate switch 21.

9-19 and 9-20 are flowcharts showing the first jackpot end process (step S118A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 026IWS2200A), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 026IWS2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step 026IWS2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step 026IWS2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step 026IWS2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step 026IWS2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS2204A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2205A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step 026IWS2206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 026IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2207A), and is in the process of shortening the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that is set to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 026IWS2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 026IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2212A), sets the high base flag, and shifts to the high base state (step 026IWS2213A). Further, the special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, the high base number counter is not set only by setting the high base flag. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 026IWS2504A of the first gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. It is determined as Y in step 026IWS2010A of the first special symbol stop processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 026IWS2011A is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 026IWS2219A), and sets the special time reduction flag to enter the KT state. Transition (step 026IWS2220A). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step 026IWS2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) (step 026IWS2223A).

FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing the first small hit end process (step S121A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2300A), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 026IWS2304A. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301A), and control is performed to transmit the small hit end designation command (step 026IWS2302A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303A), and the process is performed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304A, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2305A), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) (step 026IWS2309A). ).

FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it means that the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol. In addition, the case is not during the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) or the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 026IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step 026IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 026IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 026IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 026IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 026IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 026IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69B without performing the processing after step 026IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 026IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 026IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 026IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 026IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 026IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 026IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 026IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 026IWS61B). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step 026IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 026IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 026IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 026IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 026IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 026IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 026IWS65B). Step 026IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 026IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 026IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 9-4 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 026IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 026IWS70B). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 026IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 026IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 026IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 026IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B.

Then, in step 026IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 026IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 026IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 026IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIGS. 9-15. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 9-15, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 026IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 9-6 (D) to 9-7 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (D). Select, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, select the second variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (F). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-7 (I) is selected.

The second special symbol variation process is the same as the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) shown in FIGS. 9-16. That is, in the first special symbol variation processing shown in FIGS. 9-16, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation processing is explained.

In the second special symbol variation processing, the same processing as in steps 026IWS1124A to S1126A of the first special symbol variation processing is executed, and the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. If so, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to transmit the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command, and the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be forcibly missed. With such a configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing in which the player is absent can be generated. It can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol (on the right side of the gaming area). In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning opening, which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via a time-saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 026IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 026IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS2014B). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 026IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2016B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the process proceeds to step 026IWS2018B as it is.

If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot signal output flag (step 026IWS2017B). In this feature unit 026IW, based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step 026IWS2017B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 If the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 026IWS2018B), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 026IWS2019B), and sets "1" in the round number counter (step). 026IWS2020B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2021B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step 026IWS2023B).

By executing the processes of steps 026IWS2021B and S2022B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 026IWS2024B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2025B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2026B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2027B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 026IWS2028B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2029B).

By executing the processing of step 026IWS2027B and S2028B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 026IWS2026B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

If the second small hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2024B), the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2030B).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 026IWS2501B). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2502B). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the process proceeds to step 026IWS2504B as it is.

If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, unless it is in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot signal output flag (step 026IWS2503B). In the feature unit 026IW, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step 026IWS2503B, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 If the external output is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time reduction flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step 026IWS2504B). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second jackpot start designation command (step 026IWS2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second jackpot opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2506B).

In this feature unit 026IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the second gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 41 On the condition that the game ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21, the game is configured to shift to the big hit game.

9-25 and 9-26 are flowcharts showing the second big hit end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second big hit end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 026IWS2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step 026IWS2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step 026IWS2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step 026IWS2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step 026IWS2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS2204B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2205B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 026IWS2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 026IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2207B), and sets the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2207B). Step 026IWS2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the control is performed in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is neither a 16R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 9R probability variation jackpot (step 026IWS2209B). Whether or not it is a 9R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 026IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 9R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2212B), sets the high base flag, and shifts to the high base state (step 026IWS2213B). Further, the special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2214B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of a 9R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 9R probability variation jackpot, the high base number counter is not set only by setting the high base flag. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 026IWS2504B of the second gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 9R probability variation jackpot is completed, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. In the second special symbol stop process, it is determined as Y in step 026IWS2010B, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step 026IWS2011B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 9R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 026IWS2219B), and sets the special time reduction flag to enter the KT state. Transition (step 026IWS2220B). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step 026IWS2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2223B).

FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing the second small hit end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2300B), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 026IWS2304B. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301B), and control is performed to transmit the small hit end designation command (step 026IWS2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303B), and the process is performed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304B, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2305B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2306B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2307B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting end designation command (step 026IWS2308B).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2309B).

Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW will be described. FIG. 9-28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW. First, in this feature unit 026IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 16R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 026IWS2206A-S2208A). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and until the next jackpot occurs. A high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 026IWS2209A, S2212A-S2214A). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 026IWS2219A to S2221A).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature unit 026IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 9R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, when a 9R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 9R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 9-3), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B).

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, when a 9R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B). In this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 9-3 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 9-28 shows. As shown, it transitions to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 026IWS2010A-S2014A).

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 9-3 (D) and 9-3 (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 9R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B).

In addition, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 9R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

9-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally every time a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this example) are paid out. Further, a jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire jackpot game (that is, a signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress). Further, a jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire jackpot game and during the KT state (that is, a signal indicating that the player is in a continuous villa). Further, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. Further, a signal for the planned number of prize balls is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal board. The planned number of prize balls signal is a signal that is output externally every time the planned number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

For each external signal shown in FIGS. 9-29, for example, the timing of paying out 10 prize balls, the timing of a big hit, the timing of the occurrence of a prize at a special winning opening, and the planned number of prize balls reached 10. Flags (see, for example, steps 026IWS2017A, S2017B, S2503B) and timers corresponding to the output of external signals are set at the timing, and information output processing (step S23) is executed based on the setting of those flags and timers. It is output to the outside to a hall computer or the like.

Next, the output timings of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 among the external output signals will be described. FIG. 9-30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timings of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2. In this example, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in steps 026IWS2017A and S2503B when the gaming state is the normal state, and the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are executed. External output is started. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the jackpot game is completed. Further, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped at the timing when the KT state is finished. On the other hand, when the game state is the KT state, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in steps 026IWS2017A and S2017B, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started. NS. In this case, since the KT state is in progress, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output to the outside. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.

First, the output timings of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-30 (1). As shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), when the game state is the normal state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. The external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the same timing, and the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is started (see step 026IWS2017A). On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. The external output is not started, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the timing when the game ball wants to pass through the passing gate 41, and the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is started (see step 026IWS2503B).

Next, using FIG. 9-30 (2), the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot when the gaming state is the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). The output timing of the signal 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-30 (2), when the game state is the KT state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. The external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the same timing (see step 026IWS2017A). Further, when the game state is the KT state, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is output at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. It is started (see step 026IWS2017B). As shown in FIG. 9-30 (2), the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output to the outside in the KT state.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step 026IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passing process (step 026IWS5113).

In this feature unit 026IW, when the process of steps 026IWS5111 to S5113 is executed and the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature unit 026IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 026IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In addition, in this feature unit 026IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step 026IWS5111 regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, the gate switch passing process of step 026IWS5113 is executed. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in this feature unit 026IW, the passing gate 41 is normally used as a gate for both the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the operating region is performed. The detection process is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 026IWS5113): In the CPU 103, the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, " 4 ”) is confirmed. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100): When the CPU 103 is in a state where it can start the fluctuation of the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 026IWS5100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 20 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation processing (step 026IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 026IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 026IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 026IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 026IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 026IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer and sets the timer. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 026IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step 026IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100).

FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 026IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step 026IWS5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing storage number is not 0 (N in step 026IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing storage number = 1 (step 026IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 026IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol), and determines whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 026IWS5127). In this feature unit 026IW, in step 026IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided that it will be a normal symbol with a probability.

In step 026IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 026IWS5128), and proceeds to step 026IWS5130. Further, in step 026IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step 026IWS5129), and proceeds to step 026IWS5130.

In step 026IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5131 in step 026IWS5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5132 in step 026IWS5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101) (step 026IWS5133).

FIG. 9-33 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 026IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 026IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 026IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 026IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 026IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 026IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 026IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 026IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100) (step 026IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 026IWS3708).

In step 026IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 026IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 026IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 026IWS3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 026IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 026IWS5103) (step 026IWS3707).

FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 026IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 026IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 026IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 026IWS3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 026IWS3803). , That is, in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 026IWS3805). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 026IWS3804).

In this way, in this feature unit 026IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 026IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times the 6B is opened may be set to 1 time, whereas the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened may be set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above and the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state (step 026IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 026IWS5104) (step 026IWS3807).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-35 to 9-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 026IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 026IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 026IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 026 IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 026IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 026IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 026IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 026IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 026IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 026IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 026IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 026IWS622).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step 026IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5. (Step 026IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag according to the received jackpot start designation command (step 026IWS625).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot end designation command or the second jackpot end designation command (step 026IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5. (Step 026IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first jackpot end designation command reception flag or the second jackpot end designation command reception flag according to the received jackpot end designation command (step 026IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 026IWS624 and S627, the right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 026IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 026IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 026IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 026IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 026IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 026IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 026IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 026IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command (step 026IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the blue background image) (step 026IWS638). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 026IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 026IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the green background image) (step 026IWS641). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 026IWS642), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 026IWS643).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 026IWS644), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the yellow background image) (step 026IWS645). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 026IWS646), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 026IWS647).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 026IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example,). The display is controlled by the red background image) (step 026IWS649). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 026IWS650), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 026IWS651).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step 026IWS652), the effect control CPU 120 counts the prize balls generated during the period in which small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state. The value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter for this is added by 15 (step 026IWS653). Next, the effect control CPU 120 generated during the period in which the small hits were continuously generated in the second KT state in the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition. If the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 (step 026IWS654).

In this example, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 starts to be displayed when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the normal state or the first KT state, except for the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot. The display is terminated when the jackpot of is generated (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or higher than any of the threshold values (step 026IWS655). If the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter after addition is equal to or higher than any of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 determines the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter after addition in the image display device 5. Control is performed to display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 according to (step 026IWS656). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 by winning the big prize opening this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value "1000" has been reached, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 026IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter (step 026IWS658). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition, if the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is displayed. Control is performed to update the number of middle prize balls display 1 (step 026IWS659).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or higher than any of the threshold values (step 026IWS660). If the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter after addition is equal to or higher than any of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 determines the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter after addition in the image display device 5. Control is performed to display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 according to (step 026IWS661). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 by winning the big prize opening this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value "1000" has been reached, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

In this example, the case where the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on the winning in the large winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening 10 during the consecutive small hits in the second KT state, the value corresponding to the number of prize balls for the winning in the general winning opening 10 is the number of consecutive small hits. It may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 or display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 026 IWS662). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS611.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) executes the demo display control process in, for example, the effect control process process (step S76). 9-38 and 9-39 are flowcharts showing the demo display control process. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designation command has been received (step 026IWS4701), and if not, proceeds to step 026IWS4706. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step 026IWS4702), and if it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state nor the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state is set, the normal state is determined.

Whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received is determined by, for example, when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received in the command analysis process (step S75), the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received. A flag indicating that the specified command has been received may be set, and in step 026IWS4701, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

Further, the first KT state flag and the second KT state flag are, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), the low accuracy / first KT background specification command, the high accuracy / first KT background specification command, and the high accuracy / second KT background specification. Set based on the receipt of the command.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring the value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step 026IWS4703). The first demo waiting flag indicating that the first demo display is waiting is set (step 026IWS4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step 026IWS4705).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first demo waiting flag is set (step 026IWS4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step 026IWS4707). Y), or when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 026IWS4708), the process proceeds to step 026IWS4712. As a result, when the first special symbol change is started or the jackpot game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol, the first demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step 026IWS4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first special symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. Further, in step 026IWS4708, when the second jackpot start designation command is received, it is determined that the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

When the first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol change is not started (N in step 026IWS4707), and the jackpot game state is not controlled based on the change in the second special symbol (N in step 026IWS4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out (Y in step 026IWS4710), the first demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and the first demo Reset the wait flag (step 026IWS4712).

After that, when the first demo is being displayed (Y in step 026IWS4713), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the first special symbol (Y in step 026IWS4714), or is based on the change in the second special symbol. When the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (Y in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display ends (step 026IWS4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second customer waiting demo display designation command has been received (step 026IWS4801), and if not, proceeds to step 026IWS4806. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step 026IWS4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4805. Specifically, if any of the first KT state flag and the second KT state flag is set, it is determined that the state is KT.

Whether or not the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received is determined by, for example, when the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received in the command analysis process (step S75), the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received. A flag indicating that the specified command has been received may be set, and in step 026IWS4801, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

In the KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets a second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time until the second demo display is started (for example, 30 seconds) (step 026IWS4803). The second demo waiting flag indicating that the second demo display is waiting is set (step 026IWS4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step 026IWS4805).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second demo waiting flag is set (step 026IWS4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step 026IWS4807). If it is not in the Y) or KT state (N in step 026IWS4808), the process proceeds to step 026IWS4812. As a result, the second demo display is not executed when the second special symbol change is started or the KT state ends. Specifically, in step 026IWS4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second special symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. Further, in step 026IWS4808, if either the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the second demo waiting flag is set, the second special symbol change is not started (N in step 026IWS4807), and the KT state is not completed (Y in step 026IWS4808), the value of the second demo waiting timer. Is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS4809), and if the second demo standby timer times out (Y in step 026IWS4810), the second demo display is started (step 026IWS4811), and the second demo standby flag is reset (step 026IWS4812). ).

After that, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the second demo display (Y in step 026IWS4813), the change of the second special symbol is started (Y in step 026IWS4814), or the KT state ends (step). 026IWS4815 N), the second demo display is finished (step 026IWS4816).

FIG. 9-40 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 026IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 026IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 026IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 026IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 026 IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 026IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 026 IWS816).

By executing the process of steps 026IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 026IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

FIG. 9-41 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (step 026IWS920). Whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, that the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is. When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit (step 026IWS921). Whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit is checked, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 8 designation command. It can be judged by. If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 026IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. You can hardly expect a prize. Therefore, by executing the process of steps 026IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents the player from having excessive expectations.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in step 026IWS920) or when there is no small hit variation (N in step 026IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. Is determined (step 026IWS923). In step 026IWS923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of order), only the outlier symbol or the left and right decorative symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are completely inconsistent are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols on the left, middle, and right is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 9R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined), the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is an odd number other than "7". Determine the combination of the aligned symbols. In addition, when the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols including the special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. .. In addition, when a display result 5 designation command or a display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even numbers. To determine. Further, when the display result 8 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 026IWS924). To check whether the variation display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 026IWS928 as it is. If the fluctuation is out of alignment (Y in step 026IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 026IWS925).

In step 026IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 026IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set the effect. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 9-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-42, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-42, the set value “2” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-42, the set value “3” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-42, the set value “4” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-42, the set value “5” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 9-42, the set value “ When it is "6", the execution rate is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 026IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 026IWS928 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 026IWS926), that is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 026 IWS927).

FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-43, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is not determined, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 9-43, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6". Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the probability of continuation is high), and the setting value "6" is set. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be longer without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. Selects a process table according to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 026IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 026IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 026IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 026IWS930). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 026IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 026IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 026IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 026IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the deviation variation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 026 IWS932).

9-44 and 9-45 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 026IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9706. In this feature unit 026IW, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 026IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 026IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 026IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 026IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9716. In the feature unit 026IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 026IWS9715. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 026IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 026IWS9716 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 uses the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step 026IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, in step 026IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120 controls to confirm and display the outlier symbol.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (Y in step 026IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 026IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands (first jackpot start designation command, second jackpot start designation command) has been received (step 026IWS9706). When any of the jackpot start designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 026IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot generated this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 026IWS9708). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or a display result 6 designation command. can. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9710 as it is.

If it is neither a 16R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, it means that the second KT state ends after the end of the current jackpot game if it is in the second KT state. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 clears the values of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits generated during the second KT state and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter to 0 ( Step 026IWS9709).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 026IWS9710). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 026IWS9711), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 026IWS9712).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 026 IWS9713).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (N in step 026IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (Y in step 026IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. Set the symbol display flag 2 (step 026IWS9715).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 026IWS9716). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 026IWS9717).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 026IWS9718). Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit continuous number counter after the update. Then, the control for updating the small hit continuous number display 1 is performed (step 026IWS9719).

In this example, the small hit continuous number display 1 starts to be displayed when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the normal state or the first KT state, and a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is displayed. The display is terminated when it occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the threshold values (step 026IWS9720). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 determines the small hit continuous number according to the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition in the image display device 5. Control to display the display 2 is performed (step 026IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is 10, it means that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times in this small hit occurrence, so the threshold value "10" is reached. The small hit continuous number display 2 indicating that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "10COMBO" is displayed as the small hit continuous number display 2.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 026IWS9722). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 026IWS9723), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 026IWS9724).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 026 IWS9725).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step 026IWS9704 and N in step 026IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 026IWS9726).

Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 026IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), when the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is being executed on the image display device 5, the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is determined in FIG. 9-46 (B1). )-(B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-46 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying a predetermined character image 026IW001,026IW002,026IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B1), the image display device 5 is set by displaying a predetermined character image 026IW001 in a blue display color. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B2), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 026IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B3), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 026IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestion production is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-46, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. You can have a sense of expectation for it.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 026IW004 such as "small hit RUSH", and the second KT state. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-47 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-47 (B1) and 9-47 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying a predetermined effect image 026IW005, 026IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where an image of a racing car is displayed as a predetermined effect image 026IW005, 026IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 026IW005 in a blue display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B2), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 026IW005 in a red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 9-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 9-48 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 026IWS2021A and S2021B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (steps 026IWS2022A, S2022B, S634). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 026IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 026IWS2027B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (2), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (see steps 026IWS2028B and S634). .. However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (2), the right-handed display 026IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (3), the right-handed display 26 is turned on and the right is turned on during the small hit game. The striking notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right striking display 026IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

As described above, according to the feature unit 026IW, the first identification information (for example, the game ball) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). , The first special symbol) can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium has entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). Variable display of is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) For example, it can be controlled to either the small hit game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. Further, the first start area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the movement path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is out of the movement path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and the first identification information is variably displayed. When the special state is controlled after the execution of, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 9-48 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature unit 026IW, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when the small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special If the variable display of the symbol is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player wastes the game ball, and on the contrary, a disadvantageous launch promotion notification is given, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. The information is provided as a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage. Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is set. It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) is displayed. It is possible to control the small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2) are lit) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute a highly likely second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 026IW007 shown in FIG. 9-48 (1)). Further, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-48 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the control is performed in the special state. At that time, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-48 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 9-48 (2) and 9-48 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) at least corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained). , Forcibly stop and display the non-reach out-of-reach symbol). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. On top of that, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the strategy measures against the gaming machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. It is provided with an effect control means for controlling (for example, an effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The case is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made on the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made on the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing the right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a gaming machine provided on the left side of the gaming area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are lit. The right-handed display 026IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed display 026IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. May be configured to execute right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 026IW007 as shown in FIG. 9-48 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangle display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type. The selection ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the case is a small hit or a small hit is obtained by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls can be easily selected. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-48 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-48 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9). See -2). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, as special states, there are a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-47) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-46) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects are conceivable.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. The number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-4). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 026IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of small hit types is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the small hit type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to this feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-3). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 026IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-8). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 026IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in this feature unit 026IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem does not occur. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the fluctuation efficiency is set to be different depending on the set value by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. It is decided that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the variable display and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) is included. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. The number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 9-46) that suggests a set value is executed. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-2), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

The feature unit 026IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to be able to output a specific signal. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 describes that a jackpot signal (specific signal) is output from an external output terminal during all jackpot states.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506, whether it is in a normal state or a special state, and whether a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information, or the second identification information. No consideration is given to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of. Therefore, it is necessary to appropriately output a signal when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state.

Therefore, in order to solve the problem that the present feature unit 026IW can appropriately output a signal when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, the following means (1) to (5) The configuration is disclosed.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). A gaming machine that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and is a variable display of the first identification information. A portion for executing steps S110A to S113A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, which can execute the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. 2 After the special symbol process processing (step S25B) satisfies the same processing as in steps S110A to S113A and the predetermined conditions (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed), the specific area (for example, the passing gate 41) Step S115A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100 based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) to the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). A part that executes ~ S118A, a part that executes the same processing as steps S115A to S118A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B), and a special state control means (for example, a game control micro) that can be controlled to a special state. A portion of the computer 100 that executes steps S119A to S121A of the first special symbol process processing (step S25A), a portion that executes the same processing as steps S119A to S121A in the second special symbol process processing (step S25B)), and the usual Steps 026IWS2208A, S2213A, S2214A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B in the game control microcomputer 100, which can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the game value is more likely to be given by the special state than the state. , S2213B, S2214B, S2219B, S2220B) and specific signal output means (for example, step S23 and step 026IWS2017A, S2017B in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting a specific signal (for example, a jackpot signal 1). The specific signal output means is provided with a portion for executing S2503B), and the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state. It is possible to output a specific signal based on it (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), in the normal state, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is output based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol. No specific signal is output based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), in the normal state, the second identification information is started). Even if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is not started). According to such a configuration, a signal can be appropriately output when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the specific signal is a signal (for example, a jackpot signal 1) that can specify the control to the advantageous state, and the specific signal output means is determined by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state. When the condition is satisfied, a specific signal can be output based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), in the normal state, the second special symbol is used. When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 may be started based on the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41). According to such a configuration, it can be specified that the gaming machine is controlled in an advantageous state outside the gaming machine.

(Means 3) In means 1 or 2, special signal output means (for example, step S23 and step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting a special signal (for example, a jackpot signal 2) corresponding to a special state and an advantageous state. The part that executes 026IWS2017A and S2503B) is provided, and the special signal output means can output a special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the jackpot signal 1 is External output is performed from the output terminal of terminal number "05", and jackpot signal 2 is externally output from the output terminal of terminal number "06"), and the output of the special signal is started at the same timing as the output start timing of the specific signal. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, in the normal state, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is started based on the derivation and display of the jackpot symbol by the first special symbol in the same manner as the jackpot signal 1, and the second When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 may be started based on the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41). According to such a configuration, a special signal can be appropriately output.

(Means 4) In any of means 1 to means 3, a first region (for example, a large winning opening) in which the game medium can enter in an advantageous state and a second region (for example, a large winning opening) in which the game medium can enter in a special state (means 4). For example, in a special signal output means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting a special winning opening) and a special signal corresponding to the entry of the game medium into the second region (for example, a special winning opening winning signal). The special signal output means can output a special signal by using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the jackpot signal 1 is capable of outputting the special signal). It may be configured so that it is output externally from the output terminal of the terminal number "05", and the special winning opening winning signal is output externally from the output terminal of the terminal number "07"). According to such a configuration, the state of entry of the game medium into the second region can be monitored externally.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to the means 4, the specific signal output means is determined by the variable display of the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied and in a special state by the variable display of the second identification information. When the condition is satisfied, a specific signal can be output regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-30 (1) and (2), the first When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-30 (2), the first is in the KT state. (2) When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 may be started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal corresponding to the state during the game.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 026IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value shown by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 026IW to enable the set value suggestion effect, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Right-handed notification may be configured to be executable.

[Explanation of feature part 06TM]
Next, the feature unit 06TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 026IW], it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

(Relationship between game state and production pattern and production mode)
First, each game state (low accuracy / non-KT state, low accuracy / first KT state, high accuracy / first KT state, and high accuracy / second KT state) and each production symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, And the second small symbol) and each effect mode (normal mode, time saving mode, probability variation mode, and small hit RUSH mode) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols displayed on the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5 are smaller than the decorative symbols and indicate whether or not the special symbols are variablely displayed and the display result of the special symbols. Is called a small design. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the area at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed from the left in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and so on. And the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed as the second small symbol display area 5l2 from the left. The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 and the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 all have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol, and the visibility of the second small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

10-1 (1) to (4) are explanatory views showing specific examples of decorative symbols and small symbols corresponding to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Here, there are cases where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and there are cases where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Which of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display is executed corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol differs depending on the game state. In the following description, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is referred to as the main symbol, and among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is not supported. The special symbol is called a sub symbol.

That is, the state in which the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol is defined in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1. , The variable display of the first small symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the second special symbol is changed in response to the variable display. 2 It is a state in which the variable display of small symbols is executed.

On the other hand, the state in which the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol is defined in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2. , The variation display of the second small symbol is executed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the first special symbol is changed in response to the variable display. 1 This is a state in which the variable display of small symbols is executed.

As the gaming state in the present embodiment, as described above, the "low accuracy / non-KT state" (sometimes referred to as the normal state) corresponding to the low accuracy low base state and the "low accuracy / high base state" corresponding to the low accuracy high base state are used. There are a "high accuracy / first KT state", a "high accuracy / first KT state" corresponding to a high accuracy high base state, and a "high accuracy / second KT state" corresponding to a high accuracy low base state. When the gaming state is controlled to (i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled to (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, when controlled to (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, it is controlled to (iv) high accuracy / second KT state. If so, in each case, the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in the cases of (ii) to (iv), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, "special figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "special figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

FIG. 10-1 (1) shows the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed in. Further, FIG. 10-1 (2) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the low accuracy / first KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image to be made. Further, FIG. 10-1 (3) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the high accuracy / first KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image to be made. Further, FIG. 10-1 (4) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the high accuracy / second KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image to be made.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (1) to (4), the first hold that displays the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold display 06TM010) is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. A display area 06TM011 is provided, and a second hold display area 06TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold display 06TM020) is provided at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. There is. Further, in the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, active display is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol as the main symbol being executed. An active display area 06TM031 for displaying 06TM030 is provided.

Further, a first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 for displaying the first reserved storage number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display area 06TM011), and the image display device 5 is provided with a first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015. A second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided on the right side of the screen (upper part of the second reserved display area 06TM021). Then, as described above, in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display area 5l1 for displaying the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5c1 are displayed. The first small symbol display area 5r1 is provided, and in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5, the second small symbol display area 5l2 and the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. A display area 5c2 and a second small symbol display area 5r2 are provided.

Here, the number of objects (round image) corresponding to the first reserved storage number is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 corresponds to the second reserved storage number. A number of objects (round image) are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved storage number is numerically displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved storage number is numerically displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. NS. The display range of the object in the first hold display area 06TM011 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the first hold storage number special display area 06TM015, and the first hold storage number is the first hold in the first hold display area 06TM011. It will be displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 06TM015. Further, the display range of the object in the second hold display area 06TM021 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the second hold storage number special display area 06TM025, and the second hold display area 06TM021 has the second hold storage number. 2 The number of reserved memories is displayed with higher visibility than the special display area 06TM025.

Further, in the first hold display area 06TM011 when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the gaming state is (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state). ), The number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed, but when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (Ii) Low accuracy / 1st KT state, (iii) High accuracy / 1st KT state, and (iv) High accuracy / 2nd KT state), the object itself is no longer displayed. There is. In this way, in the first hold display area 06TM011, an object corresponding to the first hold storage number is displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is any of (ii) to (iv)). Therefore, the player can check the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 even in the gaming state (any of (ii) to (iv)) in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. The number of first reserved memories can be grasped.

Further, in the second hold display area 06TM021, when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii). ) High accuracy / 1st KT state and (iv) High accuracy / 2nd KT state), the number of objects corresponding to the 2nd reserved storage number is displayed, but the main symbol is the first. When 1 is a special symbol and the sub symbol is the 2nd special symbol (that is, when the game state is (i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state)), the object itself is not displayed. There is. In this way, in the second hold display area 06TM021, an object corresponding to the second hold storage number is displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, the player can grasp the second reserved storage number by checking the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 even in the gaming state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. Can be done.

Further, in the active display area 06TM031, an object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol which is the main symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed regardless of the game state, and becomes a sub symbol. The object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is not displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 10-1 (1) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the production mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" representing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 4 and the second reserved memory number is 2, the variation display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol and the second symbol which is the sub symbol The variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel at the same time. Further, "4" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "2" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four firsts are displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM011. Hold display 06TM010 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area is executed. Variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the second small symbol display area 5l2. , The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2 execute variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is a sub symbol).

The example shown in FIG. 10-1 (2) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the time saving mode. When the effect mode is the time saving mode, a "cloudy image" representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second symbol which is the main symbol. The variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel at the same time. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four seconds are displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM021. Hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area is executed. In 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol is executed. Variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (3), the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state is shown. When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the probability change mode. When the effect mode is the probability change mode, a "rain image" representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second symbol which is the main symbol. The variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel at the same time. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four seconds are displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM021. Hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area is executed. In 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol is executed. Variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (4), the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state is shown. When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. When the production mode is the small hit RUSH mode, a "typhoon image" showing a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind, and rain is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second symbol which is the main symbol. The variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel at the same time. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four seconds are displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM021. Hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area is executed. In 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol is executed. Variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (1), when the gaming state is (i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal mode), the second special symbol is a sub symbol, but the second small symbol is displayed. When the second small symbol is changed or stopped (fixed stop) in the areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the player can change or stop the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol. It is possible to grasp that it is displayed (fixed stop). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (2) to (4), the gaming states are (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / second KT. In any of the states, the first special symbol is a sub symbol, but the first small symbol is variable display or stop display (fixed stop) in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. As a result, the player can grasp that the first special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner or is displayed as a stop (fixed stop). As described above, although the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol, the player can confirm the fluctuation status of the special symbol which is the sub symbol depending on the fluctuation status of the small symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different depending on the game state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-1KT state (normal state), as shown in FIG. 10-1 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sends the background designation command (to the normal state) sent from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the normal mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a sunny image based on the command) for designating the corresponding background image. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is the background designation command (low accuracy / first KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be a cloudy image based on the command) for designating the background image corresponding to the state. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (3), the effect control CPU 120 is the background designation command (high accuracy / first KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the probabilistic mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 as a rain image based on the command) for designating the background image corresponding to the state. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (4), the effect control CPU 120 is the background designation command (high accuracy / second KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. By setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the typhoon image based on the command) that specifies that the background image corresponding to the state is displayed, the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode.

(Game flow)
FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow of the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of effect modes. Is.

When the game state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variation display is started, and the display results of the variation display are "16R probability variation jackpot" and "6R probability variation jackpot". , And "6R normal jackpot", the jackpot game state is controlled. When the result of the variation display is "16R probability variation big hit", the game state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the big hit game state ends, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. .. Further, when the result of the variation display is "6R probability variation jackpot", the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. .. Further, when the result of the variable display is "6R normal jackpot", the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode. .. Therefore, when a jackpot occurs in a normal state, the player pays particular attention to which jackpot type is used.

When the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, and the display result of the variation display becomes "small hit". Is controlled to the small hit game state. Then, after the small hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. That is, the small hit RUSH mode continues. Further, when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variation display is started, and the display result of the variation display is "16R probability variation big hit" and When any of the "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. That is, the small hit RUSH mode continues.

When the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variation display is started, and the display result of the variation display is "9R probability variation big hit". In that case, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. Further, when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "2R normal big hit". When it becomes, it is controlled to the big hit game state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

When the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, the variation display is started, and the display results of the variation display are "16R probability variation jackpot" and "2R probability variation jackpot". If it becomes any of the above, it is controlled to the big hit game state. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Further, when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, the variation display is started, and the display result of the variation display becomes "9R probability variation jackpot". In that case, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. That is, the probabilistic mode continues.

When the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state, the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, and the display result of the variation display becomes "2R normal jackpot". Is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

When the game state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode, the variation display is started, and the display results of the variation display are "16R probability variation jackpot" and "2R probability variation jackpot". If it becomes any of the above, it is controlled to the big hit game state. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Further, when the game state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode, the variation display is started, and the display result of the variation display is "9R probability variation jackpot". In that case, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode.

When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / 1st KT state, the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode, and the display result of the variation display becomes "2R normal jackpot". Is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state, and no big hit occurs between the time when the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode and the time when the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) is executed. , The gaming state shifts from the low probability / first KT state to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), and the effect mode shifts from the time saving mode to the normal mode. That is, the change of the special symbol changes from the time when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state (after the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode) to the end of the change display of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (50 times). If the display result does not become any of the display results of "16R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "9R probability variation jackpot", and "2R normal jackpot", the fluctuation of the predetermined number of times (50th) After the display ends, the game state falls from the low probability / first KT state to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), and the effect mode falls from the time saving mode to the normal mode.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, not only when the game state is controlled to (iv) high accuracy / second KT state (effect mode: small hit RUSH mode), but also ( i) When controlled in the low accuracy / non-KT state (effect mode: normal mode), (ii) When controlled in the low accuracy / first KT state (effect mode: time saving mode), (iii) high accuracy / Even when controlled in the first KT state (effect mode: probability variation mode), a small hit can occur and be controlled in the small hit game state.

However, in the present embodiment, in the non-KT state, the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "off" and the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "small hit" are set to 15 minutes. (See FIG. 9-6 (C)), it is practically difficult to make the variable winning ball device 6B win a game ball. Further, as described above, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be open for a long time by being controlled to the high base state (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11). Even if a small hit occurs, the number of cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is extremely small (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). That is, (i) low accuracy / non-KT state (effect mode: normal mode), (ii) low accuracy / first KT state (effect mode: time saving mode), (iii) high accuracy / first KT state (effect mode: probability change). In the mode), even if a small hit occurs, the frequency at which the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 is low.

Therefore, in the gaming states of (i) to (iii), the special symbol that is the main symbol (the first special symbol in the case of (i), and the second special symbol in the case of (ii) or (iii)). When the display result of is a small hit symbol, the combination of decorative symbols "135" suggesting that a small hit has occurred is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) on the image display device 5, but the player The game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 without displaying the message prompting the special variable winning ball device 17 to win the game ball (displaying the characters "small hit !!" at the upper part of the screen). I try not to have an excessive sense of expectation.

On the other hand, in the (iv) high accuracy / second KT state (effect mode: small hit RUSH mode), the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled so as to shorten the opening time by being controlled to the low base state (FIG. 9). (Refer to -9 to 9-11), when a small hit occurs, the game ball frequently wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Therefore, in the gaming state of (iv), when the display result of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, is a small hit symbol, it is suggested that a small hit has occurred in the image display device 5 correspondingly. The combination of decorative symbols to be displayed "135" is stopped and displayed (fixed stop), and the display prompting the player to win the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 17 ("small hit !!" at the top of the screen. Characters are displayed) so that the game ball has a feeling of expectation that the special variable winning ball device 17 will win a prize.

In this way, (i) low accuracy / non-KT state (effect mode: normal mode), (ii) low accuracy / first KT state (effect mode: time saving mode), (iii) high accuracy / first KT state (effect mode). : In the probability variation mode), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that a small hit has occurred (the display result of the special symbol that is the main symbol has become a small hit symbol). In contrast to (iv) high accuracy / second KT state (effect mode: small hit RUSH mode), a small hit has occurred (the display result of the special symbol that is the main symbol is the small hit symbol). The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in a manner that allows the player to easily recognize the fact that it has become.

As described above, in the first KT state among the KT states, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). That is, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. That is, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the ratio of small hits determined when the first special symbol fluctuates is low, whereas small hits are determined when the second special symbol fluctuates. Since the ratio is configured to be high (however, except for the case of forced loss described above), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player. According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a KT state, it is possible to realize a gaming state different from the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous gaming state for the player.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal processing in this embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it means that the first special symbol display device 4A is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where neither the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the first small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to the second jackpot opening preprocessing (5) and the second jackpot opening. Medium processing (6), second jackpot opening post-processing (7), second jackpot ending processing (8), second small hit opening preprocessing (9), second small hit opening processing (10), It is confirmed whether or not the value corresponds to any of the processes of the second small hit end process (11) and the second small hit end process (11) (step S06TM1000A). The values of the second special symbol process flag are the second jackpot opening pre-processing (5), the second jackpot opening processing (6), the second jackpot opening post-processing (7), and the second jackpot end processing (8). In addition, when the value corresponds to any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11) ( YES in step S06TM1000A), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, the values of the second special symbol process flag are the second jackpot opening pre-processing (5), the second jackpot opening processing (6), the second jackpot opening post-processing (7), and the second jackpot end processing (8). ), And the value does not correspond to any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). In this case (NO in step S06TM1000A), the same process as the process after step 026IWS51A shown in FIG. 9-14 is executed.

In the process of step 026IWS52A described above, the CPU 103 transmits only the first customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control CPU 120, but the CPU 103 is not limited to this, and in the process of step 026IWS52A, the CPU 103 controls the effect. First customer waiting demo display specification command and effect control command (low accuracy / non-KT background specification command, high accuracy / second KT background specification command, high) to specify the background display corresponding to the current game state to the CPU 120 for Either the confirmation / first KT background specification command and the low probability / first KT background specification command) may be transmitted.

In this way, in step S06TM1000A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the period is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, and the second special When the period is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the symbol (YES), the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to the value indicating the first special symbol normal processing. By not updating from (0) to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started.

If the variation display of the first special symbol is started during the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the started first special symbol is started. The control when the fluctuation display result of is "big hit" or "small hit" becomes a problem, and the game control becomes complicated. As in the present embodiment, during the period in which the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started. The game state is properly controlled. Further, when the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state (big hit game state, small hit game state) based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, so that the game is played. The person is focused on the game in the advantageous state.

In addition, the second special symbol normal processing in the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it means that the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol. In addition, it is neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the second small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first jackpot opening preprocessing (5) and the first jackpot opening. Medium processing (6), first jackpot opening post-processing (7), first jackpot ending processing (8), first small hit opening preprocessing (9), first small hit opening processing (10), And, it is confirmed whether or not the value corresponds to any of the processes of the first small hit end process (11) (step S06TM1000B). The values of the first special symbol process flag are the first jackpot opening pre-processing (5), the first jackpot opening processing (6), the first jackpot opening post-processing (7), and the first jackpot end processing (8). In addition, when the value corresponds to any of the first small hit opening pre-processing (9), the first small hit opening processing (10), and the first small hit end processing (11) ( YES in step S06TM1000B), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, the values of the first special symbol process flag are the first jackpot opening pre-processing (5), the first jackpot opening processing (6), the first jackpot opening post-processing (7), and the first jackpot end processing (8). ), And the value does not correspond to any of the first small hit opening pre-processing (9), the first small hit opening processing (10), and the first small hit end processing (11). In this case (NO in step S06TM1000B), the same process as the process after step 026IWS51B shown in FIG. 9-22 is executed.

In the process of step 026IWS52B described above, the CPU 103 transmits only the second customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control CPU 120, but the CPU 103 is not limited to this, and in the process of step 026IWS52B, the CPU 103 controls the effect. Second customer waiting demo display specification command and production control command (low accuracy / non-KT background specification command, high accuracy / second KT background specification command, high) that specifies the background display corresponding to the current game state to the CPU 120 for Either the confirmation / first KT background specification command and the low probability / first KT background specification command) may be transmitted.

In this way, in step S06TM1000B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the period is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, and the first special When the period is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the symbol (YES), the value of the second special symbol process flag is set to the value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. By not updating from (0) to the value (1) indicating the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not started.

If the variation display of the second special symbol is started during the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the started second special symbol is started. The control when the fluctuation display result of is "big hit" or "small hit" becomes a problem, and the game control becomes complicated. As in the present embodiment, during the period in which the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is not started. The game state is properly controlled. Further, when the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state (big hit game state, small hit game state) based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is not started, so that the game is played. The person is focused on the game in the advantageous state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3, if the first reserved storage number is 0 in the first special symbol normal processing (YES in step 026IWS51A), the first customer waiting demo display designation command is used for effect control. It is transmitted to the CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, if the second reserved storage number is 0 in the second special symbol normal processing (YES in step 026IWS51B), the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 026IWS52B).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command, and the game state is (i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normally). The state) is controlled, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started (the first reserved memory number remains 0), and the jackpot game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol is not started. Occasionally, when the first demo standby timer times out, the image display device 5 starts the first demo display described later. On the other hand, when the gaming state is not controlled to (i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), ((ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv). When the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received (when controlled to either the high accuracy / second KT state), the first demo display is not started.

In the first demo display, the push button 31B is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 against the background of a sunny image which is a background image corresponding to the current gaming state ((i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state)). The operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu" are displayed. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated while the operation promotion display 06TM050 is displayed, a menu screen including a volume control bar and a light intensity control bar is displayed, and the stick controller 31A and the push button are displayed. By operating 31B, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command, and the game state is (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii). ) High accuracy / 1st KT state and (iv) High accuracy / 2nd KT state are controlled, and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is not started (the 2nd reserved memory number is 0). If the second demo standby timer times out while the game state is being continued, the image display device 5 starts the second demo display described later. In addition, in any of the gaming states (ii) to (iv), when the jackpot gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is started, it ends because it temporarily shifts to the low accuracy / low base state. Will be done. On the other hand, when the gaming state is not controlled by any of the gaming states (ii) to (iv) ((i) when it is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state)), the second When the customer waiting demo display specification command is received, the second demo display is not started.

In the second demo display, the background corresponding to the current gaming state (any of (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / second KT state)). With the image (either a cloudy image, a rain image, or a typhoon image) as a background, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and " The words "Menu" are displayed. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated while the operation promotion display 06TM050 is displayed, a menu screen including a volume control bar and a light intensity control bar is displayed, and the stick controller 31A and the push button are displayed. By operating 31B, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted.

In this way, the CPU 103 transmits the first customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the number of first reserved storages is 0 in the first special symbol normal processing, and the second reserved storage in the second special symbol normal processing. The second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted based on the number being 0. That is, the CPU 103 transmits different customer waiting commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the special symbol. As a result, on the effect control CPU 120 side, the customer waiting command corresponding to the current gaming state, that is, (i) the first customer waiting demo display designation command in the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), (ii). ) Only when the second customer waiting demo display specification command is received if any of (low accuracy / 1st KT state, (iii) high accuracy / 1st KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / 2nd KT state) is received. , The demo display can be started, and the demo display can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state.

In this embodiment, in both the first demo display and the second demo display, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu" are displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the game is in the gaming state. Except for different effect portions (background images), a common effect mode is adopted depending on whether the first demo display is performed or the second demo display is performed. Not limited to such a form, the first display and the second demo display may have different production modes other than the different production portion (background image) depending on the game state.

For example, in the first demo display executed when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received, the objects to be displayed in the demo display at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the "menu"". In the second demo display, which is executed when the second customer waiting demo display specification command is received, the object to be displayed in the demo display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 (operation in this example) is displayed. The promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu") may be displayed. According to such a configuration, in each game state, the object is displayed in the hold display area corresponding to the special symbol which is the main symbol (for example, in the normal state, it corresponds to the first special symbol which is the main symbol. The object is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011 and the object is displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol in the high accuracy / second KT state). It becomes easier for the player to recognize the current game state and the main symbol.

The display color of the object to be displayed may be different between the first demo display and the second demo display. For example, in the first demo display, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu" are displayed in blue. In the second demo display, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu" may be displayed in red. Further, the object itself (object shape) to be displayed may be different between the first demo display and the second demo display. For example, in the first demo display, the image imitates the push button 31B and is a push button. The operation promotion display 06TM050 that prompts the user to operate the 31B may be displayed, and the operation promotion display 06TM050 that is an image imitating the stick controller 31A and prompts the operator to operate the stick controller 31A may be displayed in the second demo display.

(Starting prize during demo display)
Next, after the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal mode), when the first demo display is being executed, a small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the small hit is made. An example of the effect in which the game medium starts and wins the winning ball device 6A while being controlled to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first demo display and the start winning, and FIG. 10-6 shows an example of the effect image related to the first demo display and the start winning. It is explanatory drawing.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 executes the first demo display on the image display device 5, and displays the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0, "0" is set in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. Is displayed as "0".

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is used when the variation display is fixedly stopped based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". The decorative symbols (2, 4, 7) are continuously displayed in the symbol display area (5L, 5C, 5R) even during the first demo display, and the small symbols (2, 4) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped. , 7) are continuously displayed in the first small symbol display area (5l1, 5c1, 5r1).

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 (1,3) in response to the end of the variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol being executed. 5) is fixedly stopped. That is, in response to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being "small hit", the combination of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped and controlled to the small hit game state (FIG. 10). Timing of T1 shown in -5). Here, since the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state) corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol, it is based on the variation display of the second special symbol as described later. Even if it is controlled to the small hit game state, it is continuously executed without ending the first demo display.

Next, during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol, a new start prize is generated to the winning ball device 6A while the first demo display is continuously executed. Then, it is assumed that the first reserved storage number is 1 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-5). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of first reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display "1" based on the reception of the command indicating that the first reserved storage number has increased.

At this time, when the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning determination process in the first special symbol process process, and executes the first special symbol normal process in step S110A (FIG. FIG. 5). Here, as shown in FIG. 10-3 described above, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol process flag is the second small. Since the value corresponds to any of the hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11) (YES in step S06TM1000A), the first The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is not updated from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal processing to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting processing. That is, even if a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started. After that, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). (NO in step S06TM1000A), the value of the first special symbol process flag changes from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal processing to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting processing. ), And the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-38, the effect control CPU 120 determines NO in step 026IWS4714 based on the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol has not been started, and the small hit game state (second special). Since it is determined as NO in step 026IWS4715 based on the control of the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the symbol, the first demo display is not ended (step 026IWS4716 is not executed), and as a result. The first demo display will be continuously executed. That is, during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, even if a start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A, the first demo display is continued without being terminated. And execute.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the first demo display is executed (when the main symbol is the first special symbol), the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol. When (when the value of the second special symbol process flag is in the range of 9 to 11), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and whether or not the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Regardless of whether (whether or not a prize has been awarded to the first start winning opening), the execution of the first demo display is continued. Even though the variable display of the first special symbol is not started due to the control of the small hit game state, the first demo display is immediately terminated according to the winning of the first starting winning opening. In that case, the player feels uncomfortable that the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started even though the demo display is finished. Therefore, in such a state, the first demo display is not terminated even if a prize is won in the first start winning opening, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, when the first demo display is executed, when the game state is controlled to the small hit game state (small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol), the first start winning opening is entered. When a prize is generated, the effect control CPU 120 uses a command related to a small hit game state such as a small hit start designation command and a set of commands corresponding to a prize in the first start winning opening (for example, a symbol designation command, variation). The category command and the first hold storage number addition designation command) will be continuously received in a short period of time. If it is attempted to execute the effect corresponding to each command in such a situation in a short period of time, the effect control becomes complicated and the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 becomes excessively increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first demo display is executed, when the game state is controlled to the small hit game state (small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol), the first 1 Even if a prize is awarded to the start prize opening, the demo display that has already been executed is continued, and the advance notice effect corresponding to the new start prize is not executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the effect control. I try to do it.

In the present embodiment, when the first demo display is being executed, the value of the first special symbol process flag is the first during the period in which the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol is controlled. The value (0) indicating the special symbol normal processing is not updated to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting processing, and the process after the first special symbol normal processing in the first special symbol process processing does not proceed. As a result, the number of commands transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 can be suppressed, and the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

In addition, during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, although the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, a new start prize is given to the winning ball device 6A. When the above occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning determination process in step S101A. In the first start winning determination process, a process of storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first hold storage number is executed, and a random value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the fluctuation pattern. Is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

Upon receiving the command indicating that the first reserved storage number has increased, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 from "0" to "1". In this way, even if a start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A when the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not executed, but the first hold. By updating the value of the memory number special display area 06TM015, the player can recognize that at least the first start winning opening has been won and the first reserved memory number has increased.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), although the first reserved storage number has changed from "0" to "1", the first reserved display area 06TM011 has an object (round image). ) Is not displayed. That is, among the display areas capable of displaying the first reserved storage number, the first reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved storage number) is not displayed in the highly visible first reserved display area 06TM011. The first reserved storage number is displayed only in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, which has low visibility.

If, in this state, an object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 in response to the winning of the first start winning opening, the player immediately displays the variation of the decorative symbol based on the first hold memory ( It is expected that the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, which is the main symbol, will be executed, but in the state where the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first hold display is displayed. Although the object is displayed in the area 06TM011, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not started (the object is not shifted to the active display area 06TM031 and does not become the active display 06TM030), which confuses the player. Therefore, the first reserved display area 06TM011 with high visibility does not display the first reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved storage number), and the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility is not displayed. By displaying the first reserved memory number only in the player, the updated first reserved memory number is appropriately notified without confusing the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (3), when the small hit game state ends and the game state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state, the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Based on that, that is, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to the process of is no longer available (NO in step S06TM1000A), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-5).

At this time, based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4714 shown in FIG. 9-38), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display (step 026IWS4716). As a result, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters of "menu" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are hidden. On the other hand, the sunny image, which is the background image corresponding to the current gaming state ((i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state)), will be continuously displayed. In this way, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the "menu" having a higher display priority than the background image (it seems to be displayed in front of the background image). The characters "" are hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the first demo display (it seems to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu"), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player can display the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is the main symbol) before and after the variable display (when the first demo display is displayed) and after the start (the first). 1 After the demo display is hidden), it is possible to easily grasp that the game state has not changed.

The effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. Let's get started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display "0" and the active display area 06TM031 to display the active display 06TM030 as the first reserved storage number becomes 0. .. The active display 06TM030 displayed at this time is information corresponding to the hold storage based on the winning of the first starting winning opening that occurs when the first demo display is being executed. Further, with the end of the first demo display, the first hold display area 06TM011 has a number corresponding to the first hold storage number of the first hold display 06TM010 (a first generated when the first demo display is being executed). 1 Information corresponding to the hold memory based on the winning of the starting winning opening) will be displayed.

As shown above, the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied according to the end of the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, when the second demo display is executed, the second demo display does not end even when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled. It is supposed to be continued. Then, when the second demo display is executed and a start prize is generated in the second start prize opening within the period controlled by the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the start prize is generated. The variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 is updated from 0 to 1. Even at this time, the second demo display continues without ending, and the object (round image) is not displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021.

Specifically, when the second demo display is executed (the game state is (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / second KT state. When it is controlled to the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to "9" to "9" to ". Based on the range of "11", it is determined as YES in step S06TM1000B shown in FIG. 10-4, and the value of the second special symbol process flag does not correspond to the value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process. The variable display of the second special symbol is not started. Then, when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening in this state (the period during which the second demo display is executed and the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the first special symbol), the figure is shown. 9-39, step 026IWS4814 is determined to be NO, and step 026IWS4815 is determined to be YES, step 026IWS4816 is not executed, and the second demo display is not completed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the command indicating that the second reserved storage number has increased updates the value of the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5 from "0" to "1". do. However, even though the number of second hold storages has changed from "0" to "1", the object (round image) is not displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021. That is, among the display areas capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number) is not displayed in the highly visible second reserved display area 06TM021. The second reserved storage number is displayed only in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, which has low visibility.

After that, the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol ends, and the game states are (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy. When controlled to any of the game states of / 2nd KT state, the value of the 1st special symbol process flag is released based on the condition that the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd special symbol is satisfied, that is, the value of the 1st special symbol process flag is released. When the value corresponding to any of the pre-processing (9), the first small hit opening process (10), and the first small hit end process (11) is lost (NO in step S06TM1000B), the CPU 103 , Start the variable display of the second special symbol. At this time, based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4814 shown in FIGS. 9-39), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second demo display (step 026IWS4816). As a result, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters of "menu" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are hidden. On the other hand, the background image (cloudy) corresponding to the current gaming state (any of (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / second KT state). The image, rain image, or typhoon image) will be displayed continuously.

In this way, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the "menu" having a higher display priority than the background image (it seems to be displayed in front of the background image). The characters "" are hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the second demo display (it seems to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu"), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player can display the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) before and after the variable display (when the second demo display is displayed) and after the start (the second demo display). 2 After the demo display is hidden), it is possible to easily grasp that the game state has not changed.

The effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , In the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. Let's get started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 to display "0" and the active display area 06TM031 to display the active display 06TM030 as the second reserved storage number becomes 0. .. The active display 06TM030 displayed at this time is information corresponding to the hold storage based on the winning of the second starting winning opening that occurs when the second demo display is being executed. In addition, with the end of the second demo display, the second hold display area 06TM021 has a number corresponding to the second hold storage number of the second hold display 06TM020 (a second generated when the second demo display is being executed). 2 Information corresponding to the hold memory based on the winning of the starting winning opening) will be displayed.

(Special symbol change interruption processing due to small hit game state)
In the present embodiment, during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the other special symbol, one of the special symbols is displayed. The variation display of the special symbol is temporarily interrupted, and then when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the other special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is restarted. Hereinafter, the fluctuation suspension processing and the fluctuation restart processing of the special symbol due to the occurrence of the small hit will be specifically described.

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first determines one of the display result specification commands (display result) based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the decision result of the big hit type if it has not been transmitted yet. (1 designated command, display result 2 designated command, display result 4 designated command, display result 5 designated command) are controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1200A). If the first fluctuation interruption flag is not set (NO in step S06TM1200A), the process proceeds to step 026IWS1121A and subsequent steps, and if the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (YES in step S06TM1200A), the process ends as it is. The first fluctuation interruption flag is set when the display result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1122A). Step 026IWS1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1124A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step 026IWS1124A), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S06TM1210A). , It is confirmed whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B (step S06TM1220A).

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S06TM1220A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step S06TM1220A), the CPU 103 sets the first fluctuation interruption flag (step S06TM1230A) and ends the process as it is.

If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B (NO in step S06TM1220A), the CPU 103 corresponds to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the first special symbol stop process (step S113A). The value is updated to the value (step 026IWS1127A), and the process ends as it is.

By executing the processes of step S06TM1200A, step S06TM1220A, and step S06TM1230A, in this feature unit 06TM, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the first Since the 1 fluctuation interruption flag is set, the subtraction of the 1st fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121A) is not executed, and the value of the 1st special symbol process flag is not updated from the value of the 1st special symbol variation processing, the 1st special symbol The fluctuation display of is interrupted.

Further, by executing the process of step 026IWS1124A, in this feature unit 06TM, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. Is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1120A. It is controlled so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process (step S112B) in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first determines one of the display result specification commands (display result) based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the decision result of the big hit type if it has not been transmitted yet. (1 designated command, display result 2 designated command, display result 4 designated command, display result 5 designated command) are controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1200B). If the second fluctuation interruption flag is not set (NO in step S06TM1200B), the process proceeds to step 026IWS1121B and subsequent steps, and if the second fluctuation interruption flag is set (YES in step S06TM1200B), the process ends as it is. The second fluctuation interruption flag is set when the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1122B). Step 026IWS1123B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step S113B) (step 026IWS1127B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 026IWS1124B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step 026IWS1124B), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S06TM1210B). , It is confirmed whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step S06TM1220B).

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step S06TM1220B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step S06TM1220B), the CPU 103 sets the second fluctuation interruption flag (step S06TM1230B) and ends the process as it is.

If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (NO in step S06TM1220B), the CPU 103 corresponds to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the second special symbol stop process (step S113B). The value is updated to the value (step 026IWS1127B), and the process ends as it is.

By executing the processes of step S06TM1200B, step S06TM1220B, and step S06TM1230B, in this feature unit 06TM, if the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the first 2 Since the fluctuation interruption flag is set, the subtraction of the second fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121B) is not executed, and the value of the second special symbol process flag is not updated from the value of the second special symbol variation processing, the second special symbol The fluctuation display of is interrupted.

Further, by executing the process of step 026IWS1124B, if the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol in the feature unit 06TM, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1120B. It is controlled so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing the first small hit end process (step S121A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2300A), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 026IWS2304A. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301A), and if the second fluctuation interruption flag is set, the second fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step S06TM1300A). , Control to send a small hit end designation command (step 026IWS2302A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303A), and the process is performed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304A, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step 026IWS2305A), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) (step 026IWS2309A). ).

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing the second small hit end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2300B), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 026IWS2304B. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301B), and if the first fluctuation interruption flag is set, the first fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step S06TM1300B). , Control to send a small hit end designation command (step 026IWS2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303B), and the process is performed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304B, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step 026IWS2305B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2306B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2307B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting end designation command (step 026IWS2308B).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2309B).

By executing the process of step S06TM1300A, in this feature unit 06TM, when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol ends, the second variation interruption flag is reset and shown in FIG. 10-8. As described above, by determining NO in step S06TM1200B, the interrupted variation display of the second special symbol is restarted. Similarly, when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol ends, the first variation interruption flag is reset, and as shown in FIG. 10-7, NO is determined in step S06TM1200A. , The suspended display of the change of the first special symbol is resumed.

Next, after the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) or the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving mode), the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit". An example of the effect when the game is controlled to the small hit game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12.

FIG. 10-11 (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the small hit that occurred when the game state was controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). 10-12 (A1) to (A5) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to a small hit generated when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). Is. Further, FIG. 10-11 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the small hit generated when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving mode). 10-12 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to a small hit generated when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving mode). ..

[Small hit in RUSH mode]
First, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode by the effect control CPU 120. When the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode, a "typhoon image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second of the image display device 5 are executed. In the small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1 and the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the image display device 5 are executed. , And in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)). ).

Since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 06TM031 displays the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 06TM021 displays four second hold display 06TM020.

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), the image display device 5 displays the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. At the same time, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 16R probability variation big hit has occurred and the state has been shifted to the second KT state, the small hit has occurred 9 times so far, and as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), the small hit is continuous. A case where a character such as "9th time" is displayed as the number display 1 is shown. In addition, 15 x 10 balls x 16 rounds = 2400 prize balls are obtained during the big hit game based on the first 16R probability variation big hit, and 10 x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each subsequent small hit. Based on the fact that 30 x 9 = 270 prize balls were obtained by the occurrence of 9 small hits, and a total of 2670 prize balls were obtained, FIG. 10-12 (A1). As shown in the above, a case where a character such as "2670pt" is displayed as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol "1" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and a decorative symbol "3". The decorative symbol "5" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R, the second small symbol "1" is in the second small symbol display area 5l2 of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol is in the second small symbol display area 5c2. "3" and the second small symbol "5" are fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display area 5r2 (timing of T2 shown in FIGS. 10-11). That is, the combination of the decorative symbol and the second small symbol whose variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" is fixedly stopped, and the combination is controlled to the small hit game state. In addition, the occurrence of a small hit is notified by displaying the characters "small hit !!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. Then, since the game state is controlled to the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit continuous number display 1 to "10th time".

Next, during the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open (the period of T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)), FIG. 10-12 (A3). ), The effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 and the four second hold display 06TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021, and displays an image. Display the character and the line "Small hit attacker is open!" On the device 5.

Next, while the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, three game balls were won in the special winning opening, and the number of winning balls was further increased by 10 × 3 balls = 30 to a total of 2700. It shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 is the period from the closing of the special variable winning ball device 17 to the end of the small hit game state (FIG. 10-11 (A)). During the small hit ending period of T3 to T4 shown in (1), the character and the line of "30 pt GET !!" are displayed on the image display device 5, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is updated to "2700 pt". .. Further, in this example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period in the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) is set to 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A5), when the gaming state is controlled from the small hit gaming state to the high accuracy / second KT state and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 , In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the second small symbol display area 5l2 and the second small symbol of the image display device 5 are started. In the display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is started (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 10-11).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 and activates the second hold display 06TM020 in the second hold display area 06TM021 as the second hold storage number becomes 3. The display area 06TM031 is shifted by one, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the combination of the second small symbols whose variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" is fixedly stopped, the CPU 103 uses the second special symbol in the first special symbol variation process. Since the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (YES in step S06TM1220A), the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1230A), and the process ends as it is. Then, in the subsequent step S06TM1200A of the first special symbol variation processing, the processing after step 026IWS1121A is not executed based on the fact that the first variation interruption flag is set, and the processing is terminated as it is (YES in step S06TM1200A). ). That is, since the first fluctuation timer is not subtracted during the period when the first fluctuation suspension flag is set, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted.

When the small hit game state ends, the CPU 103 executes the processes after step 026IWS2301A based on the fact that the small hit end display timer is not operating in the second small hit end process, and interrupts the first fluctuation in step S06TM1300A. The first fluctuation interruption flag is reset when the flag is set.

Since the first fluctuation interruption flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the processing after 026IWS1121A based on the fact that the first fluctuation interruption flag is not set in step S06TM1200A in the first special symbol variation processing ( NO in step S06TM1200A). That is, when the first fluctuation interruption flag is reset, the first fluctuation timer is subtracted, so that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted.

Therefore, in the second KT state, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol, the period from the timing when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state to the timing when the small hit gaming state ends (in FIG. 10-11 (A)). In the period of T2 to T4 shown), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily suspended, and at the timing when the small hit game state ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)). The variable display of the first special symbol has been resumed. In this example, the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) was the original timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol being executed ends, but the period during which the small hit game state is controlled ( Since the variation display of the first special symbol was interrupted in the period (T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)), the execution period of the variation display of the first special symbol is the variation display of the first special symbol. Is extended (from the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) to the timing of T6) by the amount of the period during which the above was interrupted (the period of T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)).

[Small hit in time saving mode]
First, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state, the effect mode is controlled to the time saving RUSH mode by the effect control CPU 120. When the effect mode is the time saving mode, a "cloudy image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is used in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second of the image display device 5 are executed. In the small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1 and the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the image display device 5 are executed. , And in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-6 (B)). ).

Since the first reserved storage number is 0 in the effect control CPU 120, "0" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 06TM031 displays the active display 06TM030 for the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 06TM021 displays four second hold displays 06TM020.

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), in the image display device 5, the small hit continuous number display 1 and the small hit continuous middle prize shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1) are displayed. The number of balls display 1 is not displayed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), in the first KT state, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is 0.2 seconds, 0.8. While it is as short as seconds or 1.8 seconds, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the 1st KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuation display), so that small hits are continuous. The number display 1 and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol "1" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and a decorative symbol "3". The decorative symbol "5" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R, the second small symbol "1" is in the second small symbol display area 5l2 of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol is in the second small symbol display area 5c2. "3" and the second small symbol "5" are fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display area 5r2 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-6 (B)). That is, the combination of the second small symbols whose display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" is fixedly stopped, and the combination is controlled to the small hit game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if a small hit occurs when the game is controlled to the first KT state, it is extremely rare for the game ball to win the special winning opening, so that the second special symbol is used. Even if the variable display result of is "small hit", it is less necessary to notify the player that a small hit has occurred. Therefore, in the first KT state, when the display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the combination of the decorative symbol and the second small symbol whose variable display result of the second small symbol is "small hit". Although (in this example, "135", etc.) is fixedly stopped, the characters "small hit !!" are not displayed at the top of the decorative symbol that has been fixedly stopped. That is, unlike the second KT state in which the player easily grasps the occurrence of the small hit by displaying the characters "small hit !!" on the upper part of the decorative symbol that has been confirmed and stopped, the first KT By not displaying characters such as "small hit !!" during the state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the occurrence of the small hit. According to such a configuration, even if the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit" during the first KT state, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit has occurred, and the first KT Even if a small hit occurs during the state, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

Next, in the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open (the period of T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)), FIG. 10-12 (B3). As shown in the above, the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol "1" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5R. 5 ”is fixed and stopped, and the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 and the four second hold display 06TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021 are erased. Further, in this example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period in the first KT state is set to 0.5 seconds.

Next, when the gaming state is controlled from the small hit gaming state to the low accuracy / first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B4). In the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area of the image display device 5 are started. In 5r2, the variation display of the second small symbol is started (the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 and activates the second hold display 06TM020 in the second hold display area 06TM021 as the second hold storage number becomes 3. The display area 06TM031 is shifted by one, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

Further, as described above, even during the first KT state, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol, the period from the timing when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state to the timing when the small hit gaming state ends (FIG. 10). During the period of T2 to T4 shown in -11 (B)), the variation display of the first special symbol is temporarily suspended, and at the timing when the small hit game state ends (shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)). (At the timing of T4), the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted. In this example, the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) was the original timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol being executed ends, but the period during which the small hit game state is controlled ( Since the variation display of the first special symbol was interrupted in the period (T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)), the execution period of the variation display of the first special symbol is the variation display of the first special symbol. Is extended by the amount of the period during which the above was interrupted (the period of T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)) (from the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) to the timing of T6).

In this way, in the first KT state, since it is practically difficult for the game ball to win the special winning opening in the small hit game state, the effect of emphasizing the small hit control (character display of "small hit !!") is executed. Instead, it is configured to shorten the small hit ending period as compared with the second KT state. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening in the small hit game state, the effect of emphasizing the small hit control (character display of "small hit !!") is executed and the second It is configured so that the small hit ending period is longer than that in the 1KT state. In this example, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period is 3 seconds in the second KT state.

As described above, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol becomes "small hit" during the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the small hit game state is controlled, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. It will be interrupted. Further, the small hit ending period in the first KT state is 0.5 seconds, whereas the small hit ending period in the second KT state is 3 seconds. Here, when the same type of small hit occurs in the first KT state and the second KT state, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is the same (for example, in the case of the small hit B, 0.8 seconds). Therefore, in the second KT state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted for [0.8 seconds + 3 seconds = 3.8 seconds], while in the first KT state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed. It is interrupted for [0.8 seconds + 0.5 seconds = 1.3 seconds].

As described above, in the first KT state in which the expectation of winning the special winning opening is low, the interruption time of the variable display can be shortened as compared with the second KT state in which the expectation of winning the special winning opening is high. If the small hit ending period common to the second KT state is provided in the first KT state, the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is not executed, and the first special despite the low expectation of winning the special winning opening. Due to the long interruption period of the variation display of the symbol (for example, 3.8 seconds), there is a large inconsistency between the variation display time of the first special symbol and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. This will give the player a sense of discomfort. By setting the small hit ending period in the first KT state to a time shorter than the small hit ending period in the second KT state as in the present embodiment, the variation display time of the first special symbol in the first KT state and the first It is possible to suppress inconsistency with the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Direction control when a big hit occurs)
Next, regarding the effect control when the variation display result of any of the special symbols becomes a "big hit" when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel at the same time. , 10-13 and 10-14.

In FIG. 10-13 (A), the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal mode), and as the display result of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit", the second special symbol It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when the display result is forcibly "off". Further, in FIGS. 10-14 (A1) to (A4), the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". , Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the display result of the second special symbol is forcibly "off".

Further, in FIG. 10-13 (B), the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit", so that the first special It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when the display result of a symbol is forcibly "off". Further, in FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4), the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit". , Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the display result of the first special symbol is forcibly "off".

(When the second special symbol is forcibly removed)
First, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode by the effect control CPU 120. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 has a second small symbol (sub symbol) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5. In the state where the variable display of the second special symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is being executed, the decorative symbol (in the main symbol) is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In addition to starting the variable display of (information corresponding to a certain first special symbol), in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display area 5l1 is started. 1 Start the variation display of the small symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-13 (A)).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has "0" in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0. Is displayed, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. The active display 06TM030 is displayed in the active display area 06TM031.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 sets "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of No. 1 is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T2 in FIG. 10-13 (A)). At this time, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is continued. That is, also in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The first small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body operation effect of operating the movable body 06TM100 from the tilted position to the upright position while maintaining the reach state, and the movable body. An effect effect is executed in which the flame effect image 06TM150 is superimposed and displayed around the 06TM100 (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-13 (A)). Since the flame effect image 06TM150 is an image having a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher), the player displays the flame effect image 06TM150 in front of the background image and the decorative symbol. appear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 executes an operation of returning the movable body 06TM100 in the upright position to the tilted position (T4 shown in FIG. 10-13 (A)). As a result, the movable body movement effect is completed, and the decorative symbol "2" is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "2" is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "2" is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R. The confirmation is stopped, the first small symbol "2" is in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol "2" is in the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol is in the first small symbol display area 5r1. The symbol "2" is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative symbol and the first small symbol whose display result of the first special symbol is a "big hit" is fixedly stopped. Then, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by displaying the characters "Big hit !!" on the upper part of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 described above, if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A in the second special symbol variation processing (YES in step 026IWS1124B), it is for effect control. Control is performed to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 (step S06TM1210B), and the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be forcibly missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has the second small symbol "7" and the second small in the second small symbol display area 5l2. The second small symbol "8" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "2" is fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display area 5r2. That is, the combination of the second small symbols whose display result of the second special symbol is "missing" is fixedly stopped.

(When the first special symbol is forcibly removed)
First, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode by the effect control CPU 120. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 has a second small symbol (sub symbol) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5. In the state where the variable display of the second special symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is being executed, the decorative symbol (in the main symbol) is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In addition to starting the variable display of (information corresponding to a certain first special symbol), in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display area 5l1 is started. 1 Start the variation display of the small symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-13 (B)).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has "0" in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0. Is displayed, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. Further, the active display 06TM030 is displayed in the active display area 06TM031.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 sets "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of No. 1 is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T2 in FIG. 10-13 (B)). At this time, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is continued. That is, also in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The first small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 performs the blackout effect described later in the variation pattern of the second special symbol at the timing (T3 shown in FIG. 10-13 (B)). (At the timing of), the image display device 5 executes a blackout effect. The blackout effect in the present embodiment reduces the visibility of the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach effect image by displaying the darkened image 06TM200 as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. It is a production that makes it difficult to see. In the present embodiment, the background image and the decorative pattern become difficult to see due to the blackout effect being executed.

Here, due to the blackout effect, the decorative symbol becomes difficult to see, but the first small symbol and the second small symbol remain visible. That is, while the visibility of the decorative symbol of "2" that was stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol that was variablely displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the first small The first small symbol that is variablely displayed in the symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, And the visibility of the second small symbol which is variablely displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2 is not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 arrives at the timing when the display result of the second special symbol that has executed the variable display becomes a “big hit” (FIG. 10-13 (B)). (At the timing of T4 shown in the above), the occurrence of a big hit is notified by displaying the characters "FEVER" in the central portion (design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5. Then, the second small symbol "7" is in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "7" is in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is in the second small symbol display area 5r2. "7" is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative symbol and the second small symbol whose display result of the second special symbol is a "big hit" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 described above, if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B in the first special symbol variation processing (YES in step 026IWS1124A), it is for effect control. Control is performed to send the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 (step S06TM1210A), and the variation display of the first special symbol is controlled so as to be forcibly missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has the first small symbol “2” and the first small symbol in the first small symbol display area 5l1. The first small symbol "4" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol "7" is fixedly stopped in the first small symbol display area 5r1. That is, the combination of the first small symbols whose display result of the first special symbol is "missing" is fixedly stopped.

As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is "big hit", the combination of decorative symbols that becomes a big hit (in this example, "222"). ) Is stopped and displayed, but as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit", it is a big hit. The occurrence of a big hit is notified by displaying the characters "FEVER" without executing the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of decorative symbols. Temporarily, the special symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol is switched from one special symbol to the other special symbol in the middle of the variable display (for example, the first special symbol is switched to the second special symbol). If it is executed, it becomes unclear which special symbol is displayed, and the player may misidentify it. Therefore, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol (sub symbol) that does not correspond to the decorative symbol becomes a big hit, the effect of displaying the combination of the decorative symbols that becomes the big hit is not executed, so that the display result of any special symbol can be used. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the jackpot has been achieved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A3) and (A4), when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol is "big hit", the movable body 06TM100 is tilted. As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B3) and (B4), the variation of the second special symbol (sub symbol) that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is executed while the movable body motion effect of operating from the position to the standing position is executed. When the display result of the display is "big hit", the movable body motion effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, the player paying attention to the variable display of the decorative symbol has an unexpected irregular timing (in this example, the sub symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol). 2 It is possible to prevent the interest in the highly expected movable body movement effect from being lowered by executing the movable body motion effect at the timing (when the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit"). ..

(Processing when recovering from power failure)
Next, the processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure will be specifically described. In the present embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started after the power is turned off, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. As shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 specifies that the power has been restored from the power failure (designates to display the restoration screen) in the processing of command transmission (step S7) at the time of restoration in the game control main processing. The 1-designated command, the first hold storage number designation command, and the second hold storage number designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. If at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variablely displayed when the power is turned off, in addition to the above command, a display that specifies the display result of the variable display of the special symbol that has been executed. The result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 8 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S12) process in the game control main process, the CPU 103 enters the loop process. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Then, in the command control process (step S27) in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 is backed up in the RAM 102 with data indicating the game status when the power is turned off (game state, change status of the first special symbol, and change status of the first special symbol. A set of commands according to (such as the fluctuation status of the second special symbol) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 within one interrupt. These commands include a customer waiting demo specification command (first customer waiting demo display specification command, second customer waiting demo display specification command) that specifies that the user is in the first customer waiting state or the second customer waiting state, and the game state. Background specification commands (low accuracy / non-KT background specification command, low accuracy / 1st KT background specification command, high accuracy / 1st KT background specification command, high accuracy / 2nd KT background specification command), and symbols Confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command) and the like are included.

In the following description, on the recovery screen displayed on the image display device 5, (1) a recovery image corresponding to the main symbol, (2) a recovery image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) each production symbol (decoration) The symbol, the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image are superimposed and displayed. Regarding these images (1) to (3), the image having the highest display priority (the image that appears to be displayed in the foreground) is (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and has the display priority. The image with the second highest value (the image that appears to be displayed in the back of (1) and in front of (3)) is the recovery image corresponding to (2) sub-design, and has the highest display priority. The lower image (the image that appears to be displayed at the back) is (3) each effect design and background image.

When the power failure recovery 1 designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 executes display control of both (1) the recovery image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the recovery image corresponding to the sub symbol. .. In the present embodiment, the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is an image in which the characters "power failure is being restored" are displayed on the entire screen. Therefore, (1) When the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is displayed, this is displayed. The player cannot see the restored image corresponding to the (2) sub-symbol, which has a lower display priority than the above. As a result, the recovery screen is such that the characters "power failure recovery in progress" are displayed on the entire screen (similar to the situations 2 and 6 shown in FIGS. 10-18 described later).

FIG. 10-15 shows an example of a command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 when the power is restored from the power failure. As described above, these commands include a power failure recovery 1 designation command, a first hold storage number designation command, a second hold storage number designation command, and a display result designation command and a second special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. It is sent by interrupt processing after sending the display result specification command corresponding to. Although FIG. 10-15 shows a typical situation as the fluctuation state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off. As a situation, commands corresponding to other situations can also be sent.

“Situation 1” in FIG. 10-15 shows a situation in which the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state and the first special symbol is in the first customer waiting state as the fluctuation state when the power is turned off. There is. In the case of "situation 1", the CPU 103 performs the background specification command → the second customer waiting demo display specification command → the background specification command → the first customer waiting demo display specification command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored. Each command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 is in a gaming state when the power is turned off ((i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first. 1KT state, (iv) high accuracy / second KT state) can be specified. The first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the first hold storage number when the power is turned off is 0, and the second customer waiting demo display designation command is the second hold storage when the power is turned off. It is transmitted based on the number being 0.

In "Situation 2" of FIG. 10-15, the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state, the first special symbol is in the variable display, and the remaining time of the variable display is 8 ms as the fluctuation status when the power is turned off. The situation at the time of the above is shown. In the case of "situation 2", the CPU 103 transmits each command to the effect control CPU 120 in the order of the background designation command → the second customer waiting demo display designation command within the same interrupt process when the power is restored.

In "Situation 3" of FIG. 10-15, the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state, the first special symbol is in the variable display, and the remaining time of the variable display is 4 ms as the fluctuation status when the power is turned off. It shows the situation when. In the case of "situation 3", the CPU 103 controls each command in the order of background specification command → second customer waiting demo display specification command → first symbol confirmation specification command within the same interrupt process when the power is restored. It is transmitted to the CPU 120. Based on the reception of the background designation command and the first special symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol and the first small symbol when the first special symbol is the main symbol. , If the first special symbol is a sub symbol, the first small symbol is fixedly stopped.

In "Situation 4" of FIG. 10-15, as the fluctuation status when the power is turned off, the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display and the remaining time of the fluctuation display is 8 ms or more, and the first special symbol is waiting for the first customer. It shows the situation when it is in a state. In the case of "situation 4", the CPU 103 transmits each command to the effect control CPU 120 in the order of the background designation command → the first customer waiting demo display designation command within the same interrupt process when the power is restored.

In "Situation 5" of FIG. 10-15, as the fluctuation status when the power is turned off, the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display and the remaining time of the fluctuation display is 4 ms, and the first special symbol is in the first customer waiting state. It shows the situation when. In the case of "situation 5", the CPU 103 controls each command in the order of the second symbol confirmation designation command → background designation command → first customer waiting demo display designation command within the same interrupt process when the power is restored. It is transmitted to the CPU 120.

In "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, as the fluctuation status when the power is turned off, the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display, the remaining time of the fluctuation display is 8 ms or more, and the first special symbol is in the fluctuation display. It shows the situation when there is and the remaining time of the fluctuation display is 8 ms or more. In the case of "situation 6", the CPU 103 does not transmit a command to the effect control CPU 120 in the interrupt processing at the time of power restoration.

(Recovery screen)
Further, FIG. 10-15 shows an example of a recovery screen displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is restored. The effect control CPU 120 can display a recovery screen in a different mode according to each of the above-mentioned "situation 1" to "situation 6" gaming situations. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15, the gaming state when the power is cut off is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second symbol. This is an example when it is a special design.

In the case of "Situation 1", the effect control CPU 120 powers off based on receiving the low accuracy / non-KT background designation command, the first customer waiting demo display designation command, and the second customer waiting demo display designation command. It is possible to identify that the gaming state at the time of occurrence is the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is not executed, (1) the display control of the recovery image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, and (2) ) The display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is not executed, and (3) the display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image is executed.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays a "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative symbol, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are out of place as the decorative symbol at the time of restoration (in this example, the decorative symbol). "247") is displayed, and an out-of-order symbol ("247" in this example) is displayed as the first small symbol at the time of restoration in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the device 5, an out-of-order symbol (“152” in this example) is displayed as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold storage number special display area 06TM015 based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 0, and the second hold is based on the fact that the second hold storage number is 0. "0" is displayed in the storage number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of "Situation 2", the effect control CPU 120 has a low probability / non-probability of the game state when the power is cut off based on the reception of the low probability / non-KT background designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command. It is possible to identify that it is in the KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is not executed, (1) the display control of the recovery image corresponding to the main symbol is executed, and (2) the sub symbol is executed. The display control of the restored image corresponding to the symbol is not executed, and (3) the display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 controls (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image. As a result of the execution, the display priority is high and it is displayed over the entire screen. (1) Only the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is displayed on the screen. That is, the characters "Power off and recovering" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of "Situation 3", the effect control CPU 120 powers off based on the reception of the low accuracy / non-KT background designation command, the second customer waiting demo display designation command, and the first symbol designation confirmation designation command. It is possible to identify that the game state at the time of occurrence is the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. In addition, it is the timing at which the main symbol is fixedly stopped (that is, the timing at which the decorative symbol in the fixed and stopped state and the first small symbol in the fixed and stopped state may be displayed), and the variable display of the sub symbol is not executed. Therefore, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is not executed, and (3) each effect symbol (decoration) is not executed. Only the display control of the symbol, the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image is executed.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays a "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative symbol, and is out of the state of being fixedly stopped as the decorative symbol at the time of restoration in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. A symbol (“247” in this example) is displayed, and an out-of-order symbol (in this example) in a state of being fixedly stopped as the first small symbol at the time of restoration in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5. "247") is displayed, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 is displayed with an out-of-order symbol ("152" in this example) as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold storage number special display area 06TM015 based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 0, and the second hold is based on the fact that the second hold storage number is 0. "0" is displayed in the storage number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of "Situation 4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low probability / non-probability of the game state when the power is cut off based on the reception of the low probability / non-KT background designation command and the first customer waiting demo display designation command. It is possible to identify that it is in the KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, and (2) ) The display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is executed, and (3) the display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 controls (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image. As a result of the execution, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image are superimposed and displayed. Here, the image having a high display priority is (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, but (2) the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is the display range of the sub symbol (in the case of the first small symbol). Is limited to the upper left part of the screen, and in the case of the second small symbol, the upper right part of the screen). The design (decorative design and the first small design) and the background image can be visually recognized. As a result, "Recovering" is displayed in the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol), and each production symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and first small design) and background image will be displayed.

In the case of "situation 5", when the power is cut off, the effect control CPU 120 receives the second symbol confirmation designation command, the low accuracy / non-KT background designation command, and the first customer waiting demo display designation command. It is possible to specify that the game state of is a low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed and it is the timing when the sub symbol is fixedly stopped (that is, the timing when the second small symbol in the fixed stopped state may be displayed), (1) the main symbol. The display control of the restored image corresponding to is not executed, (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is not executed, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small) is not executed. Only the display control of the design) and the background image is executed.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays a "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative symbol, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are out of place as the decorative symbol at the time of restoration (in this example, the decorative symbol). "247") is displayed, and an out-of-order symbol ("247" in this example) is displayed as the first small symbol at the time of restoration in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the device 5, the out-of-order symbol (“152” in this example) in the fixed and stopped state is displayed as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold storage number special display area 06TM015 based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 0, and the second hold is based on the fact that the second hold storage number is 0. "0" is displayed in the storage number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of "Situation 6", since the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the command, it is not possible to specify the game state at the time of power failure, and the main symbol and sub symbol. Therefore, based on the reception of the power failure recovery 1 designation command, the display control of both (1) the recovery image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the recovery image corresponding to the sub symbol is being executed. Then, as described above, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority are superimposed and displayed, and as a result, the restoration screen becomes a screen. The text "Recovering power failure" is displayed on the entire screen.

In this example, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state when the power is cut off, but the game state is highly accurate / when the power is cut off. If any of the KT states of the second KT state, the high accuracy / first KT state, and the low accuracy / first KT state is controlled, the background specification command corresponding to each KT state is transmitted. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the background designation command can identify that the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol together with the game state (which KT state it is). Is.

For example, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol is not executed, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol is executed. If the power is cut off while the power is off, it corresponds to the case shown in "Situation 2" of FIG. 10-15. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol, and (2) the restored image corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol. Display control is executed, and (3) display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (typhoon image in this example) is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 controls (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image. As a result of the execution, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image are superimposed and displayed. Here, the image having a high display priority is (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, but (2) the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is the display range of the sub symbol (in the case of the first small symbol). Is limited to the upper left part of the screen, and in the case of the second small symbol, the upper right part of the screen). The virtual design (decorative design and the second small design) and the background image (typhoon image in this example) can be visually recognized. As a result, "Recovering" is displayed in the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol (in this example, the upper left part of the screen which is the display range of the first small symbol), and each production symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and second small design) and background image will be displayed.

In this way, when the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure, the CPU 103 is a command for specifying the game state when the power supply is cut off, and the fluctuation status of the first special symbol and the fluctuation status of the second special symbol. The set can be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the set of the above commands differs depending on the gaming state specified based on the set of the above commands, and the fluctuation status of the first special symbol and the fluctuation status of the second special symbol. It is possible to display the recovery screen of the mode. According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel, it is possible to appropriately notify the power failure recovery.

(Specific example of recovery screen in situation 6)
Next, as shown in "Situation 6" described above, a specific example of a case where a power failure occurs while the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel. Will be described. In this example, when the power is cut off, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state) (that is, the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Yes), it is assumed that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0. As described above, in "Situation 6", based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery 1 designation command, (1) a recovery image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) recovery corresponding to the sub symbol This is the state in which the display control of both images is being executed. Then, as described above, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority are superimposed and displayed, and as a result, the restoration screen becomes a screen. The words "Recovery from power failure" are displayed throughout.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), after the power is restored, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off. If the variation display of the first special symbol ends before the variation display of the second special symbol while the variation display is being executed in parallel, the first reserved storage number is 0, so that the CPU 103 has the CPU 103. , The first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A in FIG. 10-3).

Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) for each effect. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demo display designation command and background designation command have not been received, and the fluctuation pattern command and background designation command have not been received, (2) sub-symbols have been supported. The display control of the restored image is continuing. Therefore, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, "Recovering" is displayed in the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol), and each production symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and first small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) will be displayed.

Here, if the number of first reserved storage is 1 or more when the power is cut off, the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off after the recovery from the power off. After that, the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but when the fluctuation display of the next first special symbol is started, the fluctuation pattern command and the background designation command are transmitted (FIG. 10). -3 step 026IWS56A, FIG. 9-15 step 026IWS1704A). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command and the background designation command terminates (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol,). The second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. As a result, "Recovering" is displayed in the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol), and each production symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and first small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), after the power is restored, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off were displayed. If the variation display of the second special symbol ends before the variation display of the first special symbol while the variation display is being executed in parallel, the second reserved storage number is 0, so that the CPU 103 has the CPU 103. , The second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52B in FIG. 10-4).

Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-design, and (3) for each effect. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the 1st special symbol, since the 1st customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and the fluctuation pattern command and the background designation command have not been received, (1) the main symbol is supported. The display control of the restored image is continuing. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. Then, (1) a restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example) having a lower display priority than this. As a result of superimposing the image) on the recovery screen, the characters "Power failure recovery in progress" are displayed on the entire screen.

Here, if the number of second hold storages is 1 or more when the power is cut off, the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off after the recovery from the power off. After that, the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but when the fluctuation display of the next second special symbol is started, the fluctuation pattern command and the background designation command are transmitted (FIG. 10). -4 step 026IWS56B etc.). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command and the background designation command terminates (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol,). The second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. Then, (1) a restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example) having a lower display priority than this. As a result of superimposing the image) on the recovery screen, the characters "Power failure recovery in progress" are displayed on the entire screen.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (C), after the power is restored, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power was cut off. When the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are completed when the variable display is executed in parallel, the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved stored number is also 0. Therefore, the CPU 103 transmits the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, and the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A in FIG. 10-3). , Step 026IWS52B in FIG. 10-4).

Based on receiving the first customer waiting demo display designation command and background designation command, and the second customer waiting demo display designation command and background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 (1) restores corresponding to the main symbol. The image display control is terminated, (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image. (Sunny image in this example) is displayed. As a result, (3) only the production symbols (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are terminated at the same time, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example).

Here, when the first hold storage number is 1 or more and the second hold storage number is 1 or more when the power is cut off, the CPU 103 displays the variation of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. When is finished, the first customer waiting demo display specification command and background specification command, and the second customer waiting demo display specification command and background specification command are not sent, but the variation display of the next first special symbol and the next When starting the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern command and background specification command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern command and background specification command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 026IWS56A in FIG. 10-3, step 026IWS1704A in FIG. 9-15, step 026IWS56B in FIG. 10-4, etc.).

The effect control CPU 120 is based on receiving a variation pattern command and a background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern command and a background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. Then, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is terminated, (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first) is terminated. A small symbol, a second small symbol) and a background image (a sunny image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only the production symbols (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are terminated at the same time, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example).

In addition, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number was 0 and the second reserved storage number was 1 or more when the power was cut off, the first customer waiting demo corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol after the power was restored. When the display designation command and the background designation command, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol are transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 that receives these commands is (1) the main symbol. The display control of the restored image corresponding to the above is terminated, (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) is terminated. ) And the background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only the production symbols (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are terminated at the same time, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example).

Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number was 1 or more and the second reserved storage number was 0 when the power was cut off, the variation pattern command and background corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol after the power was restored. When the designated command and the second customer waiting demo display designated command and the background designated command corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 that receives these commands is (1) the main symbol. The display control of the restored image corresponding to the above is terminated, (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) is terminated. ) And the background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only the production symbols (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are terminated at the same time, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example).

FIG. 10-17 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when a power failure occurs in a low accuracy / non-KT state. As shown in FIGS. 10-17, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (main symbol: 1st special symbol, sub symbol: 2nd special symbol), and the variable display of the 1st special symbol and the first 2 It is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-17). At this time, the first reserved storage number is 0, and the second reserved storage number is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 performs a command transmission (step S7) at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and performs a power failure recovery 1 designated command and a first hold storage number. The designated command, the second reserved storage number designation command, the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, as a result of (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority being superimposed and displayed, the restoration screen becomes a "power failure" on the entire screen. The text "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interrupt permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the transmission at the time of recovery is performed. Since the command set is not sent, the text "Recovering power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, due to the execution of the game control timer interrupt process, the variation display of the first special symbol that was interrupted due to the power failure is resumed, and the variation display of the second special symbol that was interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed. (Timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-17).

Next, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 uses the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the first customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0. The background designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) for each effect. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demo display designation command and background designation command have not been received, and the fluctuation pattern command and background designation command have not been received, (2) sub-symbols have been supported. The display control of the restored image is continuing. Therefore, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, "Recovering" is displayed in the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol), and each production symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and first small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) will be displayed.

Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 uses the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 0. The background designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 ends (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol based on the reception of the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command. As a result, (3) only the production symbols (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-18 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when a power failure occurs in a low accuracy / non-KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-18, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (main symbol: 1st special symbol, sub symbol: 2nd special symbol), and the variable display of the 1st special symbol and the first 2 It is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-18). At this time, the first reserved storage number is 0, and the second reserved storage number is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 performs a command transmission (step S7) at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and performs a power failure recovery 1 designated command and a first hold storage number. The designated command, the second reserved storage number designation command, the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, as a result of (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority being superimposed and displayed, the restoration screen becomes a "power failure" on the entire screen. The text "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interrupt permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the transmission at the time of recovery is performed. Since the command set is not sent, the text "Recovering power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, due to the execution of the game control timer interrupt process, the variation display of the first special symbol that was interrupted due to the power failure is resumed, and the variation display of the second special symbol that was interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed. (Timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-18).

Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 uses the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 0. The background designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-design, and (3) for each effect. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the 1st special symbol, since the 1st customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and the fluctuation pattern command and the background designation command have not been received, (1) the main symbol is supported. The display control of the restored image is continuing. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, the text "Recovering power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change.

Next, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 uses the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the first customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0. The background designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 ends (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command. As a result, (3) only the production symbols (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-19 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when a power failure occurs in the high accuracy / second KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-19, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (main symbol: second special symbol, sub symbol: first special symbol), and the variable display of the first special symbol and the first 2 It is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-19). At this time, the first reserved storage number is 0, and the second reserved storage number is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 performs a command transmission (step S7) at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and performs a power failure recovery 1 designated command and a first hold storage number. The designated command, the second reserved storage number designation command, the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, as a result of (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority being superimposed and displayed, the restoration screen becomes a "power failure" on the entire screen. The text "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interrupt permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the transmission at the time of recovery is performed. Since the command set is not sent, the text "Recovering power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, due to the execution of the game control timer interrupt process, the variation display of the first special symbol that was interrupted due to the power failure is resumed, and the variation display of the second special symbol that was interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed. (Timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-19).

Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 uses the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 0. The background designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) for each effect. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the 1st special symbol, since the 1st customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and the fluctuation pattern command and the background designation command have not been received, (2) the sub symbol is supported. The display control of the restored image is continuing. Therefore, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, "Recovering" is displayed in the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol (in this example, the upper left part of the screen which is the display range of the first small symbol), and each production symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) will be displayed.

Next, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 uses the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the first customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0. The background designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 ends (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command. As a result, (3) only the production symbols (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-20 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition when a power failure occurs in the high accuracy / second KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (main symbol: second special symbol, sub symbol: first special symbol), and the variable display of the first special symbol and the first 2 It is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-20). At this time, the first reserved storage number is 0, and the second reserved storage number is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 performs a command transmission (step S7) at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and performs a power failure recovery 1 designated command and a first hold storage number. The designated command, the second reserved storage number designation command, the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, as a result of (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority being superimposed and displayed, the restoration screen becomes a "power failure" on the entire screen. The text "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interrupt permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the transmission at the time of recovery is performed. Since the command set is not sent, the text "Recovering power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, due to the execution of the game control timer interrupt process, the variation display of the first special symbol that was interrupted due to the power failure is resumed, and the variation display of the second special symbol that was interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed. (Timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-20).

Next, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 uses the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the first customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0. The background designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-design, and (3) for each effect. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demo display designation command and background designation command have not been received, and the fluctuation pattern command and background designation command have not been received, (1) the main symbol has been supported. The display control of the restored image is continuing. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, the text "Recovering power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change.

Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 uses the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 0. The background designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 ends (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol based on the reception of the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command. As a result, (3) only the production symbols (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

As shown above, if a power failure occurs in a situation where the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the game when the power disconnection occurs. It is possible to display the recovery screen in different modes depending on the state, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to notify the restoration process in an appropriate manner according to the variable display status of the main symbol and the variable display status of the sub symbol.

(Modification example when a start prize occurs during the demo display)
In the above-described example, when the first demo display is being executed and the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9 to 9 to In the range of 11), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and whether or not the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied (a prize is generated in the first start winning opening). Regardless of (whether or not), the execution of the first demo display is continued. Not limited to such a form, when the first demo display is executed, the start condition of the first special symbol is set when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol. As soon as it is established, the first demo display may be terminated. 10-21 and 10-22 are flowcharts showing a modification of the demo display control process.

Since the processing of step 026IWS4701 to step 026IWS4714 shown in FIG. 10-21 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-38, the description thereof will be omitted. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is started in step 026IWS4714. When the variation display of the first special symbol has not been started (NO in step 026IWS4714), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number is 0 (step 06TM1400). When the first reserved storage number is 0 (YES in step 06TM1400), the processes after step 026IWS4715 shown in FIG. 9-38 are executed. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot gaming state has been started based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (step 026IWS4715), and if the jackpot gaming state has been started (YES in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is displayed. (Step 026IWS4716), and if the jackpot gaming state has not started (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is continued.

On the other hand, when the first reserved storage number is not 0 (NO in step 06TM1400), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display (026IWS4716). That is, when the first demo display is executed, the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied regardless of whether or not the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol. Immediately end the first demo display.

Since the processing of step 026IWS4801 to step 026IWS4814 shown in FIG. 10-22 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-39, the description thereof will be omitted. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is started in step 026IWS4814. When the variation display of the second special symbol has not been started (NO in step 026IWS4814), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 06TM1500). When the second reserved storage number is 0 (YES in step 06TM1500), the processes after step 026IWS4815 shown in FIG. 9-39 are executed. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not it is controlled to the KT state (step 026IWS4815), and if it is controlled to the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display must be continued and it must be controlled to the KT state. For example (NO in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display is terminated (step 026IWS4816). That is, when the second demo display is executed, the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied regardless of whether or not the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol. Immediately end the first demo display.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not started. Then, in the processes shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39 described above, in the demo display control process, even if a start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started. , The execution of the first demo display is continued, and the execution of the second demo display is continued because the variable display of the second special symbol is not started even if the start winning prize to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs. On the other hand, in this modified example, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, but as shown in FIG. 10-21, When the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs and the first reserved storage number becomes 1 (NO in step 06TM1400), the first demo display is immediately terminated. Further, in this modified example, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, but as shown in FIG. 10-22, the variable winning is won. When the start winning prize for the ball device 6B occurs and the second reserved storage number becomes 1 (YES in step 06TM1500), the second demo display is immediately terminated.

Next, after the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal mode), when the first demo display is being executed, a small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the small hit is made. An example of the effect in which the game medium starts and wins the winning ball device 6A while being controlled to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24. FIG. 10-23 is a modified example of the time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first demo display and the start winning, and FIG. 10-24 shows the effect image related to the first demo display and the start winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 executes the first demo display on the image display device 5, and displays the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters "menu" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0, "0" is set in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. Is displayed as "0".

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is used when the variation display is fixedly stopped based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing". The decorative symbols (2, 4, 7) are continuously displayed in the symbol display area (5L, 5C, 5R) even during the first demo display, and the small symbols (2, 4) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped. , 7) are continuously displayed in the first small symbol display area (5l1, 5c1, 5r1).

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 (1,3) in response to the end of the variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol being executed. 5) is fixedly stopped. That is, in response to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being "small hit", the combination of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped and controlled to the small hit game state (FIG. 10). Timing of T1 shown in -23). Here, since the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state) corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol, it is based on the variation display of the second special symbol as described later. Even if it is controlled to the small hit game state, it is continuously executed without ending the first demo display.

Next, during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol, a new start prize is generated to the winning ball device 6A while the first demo display is continuously executed. Then, it is assumed that the first reserved storage number is 1 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-23). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of first reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display "1" based on the reception of the command indicating that the first reserved storage number has increased.

At this time, when the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning determination process in the first special symbol process process, and executes the first special symbol normal process in step S110A (FIG. FIG. 5). Here, as shown in FIG. 10-3 described above, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol process flag is the second small. Since the value corresponds to any of the hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11) (YES in step S06TM1000A), the first The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is not updated from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal processing to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting processing. That is, even if a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started. After that, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). (NO in step S06TM1000A), the value of the first special symbol process flag changes from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal processing to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting processing. ), And the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines NO in step 026IWS4714 based on the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol has not been started, and when the first reserved storage number is 0. The first demo display is terminated by determining NO in step 06TM1400 based on the absence (received a command indicating that the number of first reserved storages has increased) (step 026IWS4716 is executed). .. That is, in the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, when the start winning prize to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the first demo display is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the first demo display is executed (when the main symbol is the first special symbol), the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol. When (when the value of the second special symbol process flag is in the range of 9 to 11), the start condition of the first special symbol is set regardless of whether or not the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The first demo display is terminated according to the establishment (a prize is generated in the first start winning opening). Even though the variable display of the first special symbol is not started due to the control of the small hit game state, the execution of the first demo display is continued according to the winning of the first starting winning opening. If this happens, the player will misunderstand that the winning of the first starting winning opening was invalid. Therefore, in such a state, when a prize is won in the first start winning opening, the first demo display is terminated to suppress the occurrence of misidentification by the player. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (2), based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1 (NO in step S06TM1400 shown in FIG. 10-21), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first demo display. Finish (step 026IWS4716). As a result, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters of "menu" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are hidden. On the other hand, the sunny image, which is the background image corresponding to the current gaming state ((i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state)), will be continuously displayed. In this way, as the first reserved storage number is no longer 0, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the "menu" having a higher display priority than the background image (it seems to be displayed in front of the background image). The characters of are hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the first demo display (it seems to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters of "menu"), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player can change the game state before the end of the first demo display (when the first demo display is displayed) and after the end (after the first demo display is hidden). It is possible to easily grasp that it has not changed.

In addition, during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, although the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, a new start prize is given to the winning ball device 6A. When the above occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning determination process in step S101A. In the first start winning determination process, a process of storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first hold storage number is executed, and a random value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the fluctuation pattern. Is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

Upon receiving the command indicating that the first reserved storage number has increased, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 from "0" to "1". In this way, even if a start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A when the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not executed, but the first hold. By updating the value of the memory number special display area 06TM015, the player can recognize that at least the first start winning opening has been won and the first reserved memory number has increased.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (2), although the first reserved storage number has changed from "0" to "1", the first reserved display area 06TM011 has an object (round image). ) Is not displayed. That is, among the display areas capable of displaying the first reserved storage number, the first reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved storage number) is not displayed in the highly visible first reserved display area 06TM011. The first reserved storage number is displayed only in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, which has low visibility.

If, in this state, an object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 in response to the winning of the first start winning opening, the player immediately displays the variation of the decorative symbol based on the first hold memory ( It is expected that the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, which is the main symbol, will be executed, but in the state where the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first hold display is displayed. Although the object is displayed in the area 06TM011, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not started (the object is not shifted to the active display area 06TM031 and does not become the active display 06TM030), which confuses the player. Therefore, the first reserved display area 06TM011 with high visibility does not display the first reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved storage number), and the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility is not displayed. By displaying the first reserved memory number only in the player, the updated first reserved memory number is appropriately notified without confusing the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (3), when the small hit game state ends and the game state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state, the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Based on that, that is, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to the process of is no longer available (NO in step S06TM1000A), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 10-23).

The effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. Let's get started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display "0" and the active display area 06TM031 to display the active display 06TM030 as the first reserved storage number becomes 0. ..

In the present embodiment, when the second demo display is executed, the second demo display does not end even when the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled. It is supposed to be continued. Then, when the second demo display is executed and a start prize is generated in the second start prize opening within the period controlled by the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the start prize is generated. The variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 is updated from 0 to 1. At this time as well, the second demo display ends, and the object (round image) is not displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021.

Specifically, when the second demo display is executed (the game state is (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / second KT state. When it is controlled to the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to "9" to "9" to ". Based on the range of "11", it is determined as YES in step S06TM1000B shown in FIG. 10-4, and the value of the second special symbol process flag does not correspond to the value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process. The variable display of the second special symbol is not started. Then, when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening in this state (the period during which the second demo display is executed and the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the first special symbol), the figure is shown. It is determined as NO in step 026IWS4814 of 10-22, and further determined as NO in step S06TM1500, step 026IWS4816 is executed, and the second demo display ends.

At this time, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 1 (NO in step S06TM1500 shown in FIG. 10-22), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second demo display (step 026IWS4816). As a result, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters of "menu" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are hidden. On the other hand, the background image (cloudy) corresponding to the current gaming state (any of (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / second KT state). The image, rain image, or typhoon image) will be displayed continuously.

In this way, as the second reserved storage number becomes 1, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the "menu" having a higher display priority than the background image (it seems to be displayed in front of the background image). The characters of are hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the second demo display (it seems to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters of "menu"), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player can display the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) before and after the variable display (when the second demo display is displayed) and after the start (the second demo display). 2 After the demo display is hidden), it is possible to easily grasp that the game state has not changed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the command indicating that the second reserved storage number has increased updates the value of the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5 from "0" to "1". do. However, even though the number of second hold storages has changed from "0" to "1", the object (round image) is not displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021. That is, among the display areas capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number) is not displayed in the highly visible second reserved display area 06TM021. The second reserved storage number is displayed only in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, which has low visibility.

After that, the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol ends, and the game states are (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy /. When controlled to any of the game states of the second KT state, the value of the first special symbol process flag is set before the first small hit is released, based on the fact that the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. When the value corresponding to any of the processes (9), the first small hit opening process (10), and the first small hit end process (11) is lost (NO in step S06TM1000B), the CPU 103 determines. The variable display of the second special symbol is started.

The effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , In the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. Let's get started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 to display "0" and the active display area 06TM031 to display the active display 06TM030 as the second reserved storage number becomes 0. ..

(1) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the first gate passage waiting process (first special symbol process flag: 4) and the first jackpot opening pre-processing (first) in the first special symbol process process. Special symbol process flag: 5), 1st jackpot opening process (1st special symbol process flag: 6), 1st jackpot opening post-processing (1st special symbol process flag: 7), 1st jackpot end process (1st) Special symbol process flag: 8), 1st small hit release pre-processing (1st special symbol process flag: 9), 1st small hit opening process (1st special symbol process flag: 10), and 1st small hit end Processing (1st special symbol process flag: 11), 2nd gate passage waiting process in 2nd special symbol process processing (2nd special symbol process flag: 4), 2nd big hit pre-opening process (2nd special symbol process flag) : 5), 2nd jackpot opening process (2nd special symbol process flag: 6), 2nd jackpot opening post-processing (2nd special symbol process flag: 7), 2nd jackpot end process (2nd special symbol process flag) : 8), 2nd small hit opening pre-processing (2nd special symbol process flag: 9), 2nd small hit opening processing (2nd special symbol process flag: 10), and 2nd small hit end processing (2nd) An example in which special symbol process flags: 11) and are individually provided has been described.

That is, the process when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol (first special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) and the variation display result of the second special symbol. An example has been described in which the processes (second special symbol process flags: 4 to 11) when the process is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are individually provided based on the above. Not limited to such a form, processing when the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol (first special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) and the second The process (second special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) when the special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the special symbol is shared (that is, the CPU 103 executes a common program). You may do it.

Specifically, the gate passage waiting process common to the case where the first special symbol process flag is 4 and the case where the second special symbol process flag is 4, is executed, and the case where the first special symbol process flag is 5 and the case where the first special symbol process flag is 5. 2 The common jackpot release pre-processing is executed when the special symbol process flag is 5, and the common jackpot opening process is executed when the first special symbol process flag is 6 and the second special symbol process flag is 6. Is executed, the common jackpot release post-processing is executed when the first special symbol process flag is 7 and when the second special symbol process flag is 7, and when the first special symbol process flag is 8 and the second The common jackpot end processing is executed when the special symbol process flag is 8, and the common small hit release preprocessing is executed when the first special symbol process flag is 9 and when the second special symbol process flag is 9. It is executed, and the common small hit opening process is executed when the first special symbol process flag is 10 and when the second special symbol process flag is 10, and when the first special symbol process flag is 11, the second special symbol process flag is 11. The small hit end process common to the case where the special symbol process flag is 11 may be executed. As described above, the processing related to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state depends on whether the processing is based on the variation display result of the first special symbol or the variation display result of the second special symbol. You may make the program common.

(2) In the above embodiment, the gate passage waiting state after the jackpot symbol has been fixed and stopped (the state before the jackpot start, when the first special symbol process flag is "4", or the second special symbol process flag is set. Even in the case of "4"), the demo display corresponding to the gaming state may be executed. That is, when the game ball does not pass through the passing gate 41 even after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the jackpot symbol has been fixed and stopped (when the game ball is not detected by the gate switch 21), the game is played. When the state is (i) low accuracy / non-KT state, the first demo display is executed, and the gaming state is (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high. The second demo display may be executed when either the certainty / second KT state is reached.

As described above, in the state of waiting for the gate to pass, even if a prize is generated in the first start winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning is not started, and the winning in the second starting winning opening is started. Even if it occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize is not started. The effect control CPU 120 displays the demo during execution (No. 1) in response to the winning of the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening while the demo display is being executed while waiting for the gate to pass. A notification (for example, "pass through the gate to start a big hit" or "hit right" is given to prompt the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41 while ending the 1st demo display or the 2nd demo display. Notification of displaying characters on the image display device 5) may be executed. That is, regardless of the game state (regardless of whether the first demo display is executed or the second demo display is executed), the game is executed according to the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening. It is also possible to end the demo display that is being executed and end the running demo display in response to the winning of the game ball in the second start winning opening. In this way, even in the state of waiting for the gate to pass through, it is possible to realize appropriate control regarding the demo display according to the state in which the starting condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that when a start prize is generated during the demo display in the state of waiting for the gate to pass, the running demo display may be continued. For example, when a start prize (a prize in the first start prize opening or a prize in the second start prize opening) occurs during the demo display while waiting for the gate to pass, the game ball does not end the running demo display. It may be continued until it passes through the passing gate 41 (until the big hit start effect is started). Further, when a start prize is generated during the demo display in the gate passage waiting state, the running demo display may be continued according to the game state at that time. For example, the game state is (i). In the low accuracy / non-KT state (during the first demo display), the first demo display is terminated when a prize is entered in the first start winning opening, but a prize is generated in the second start winning opening. Even if the first demo display is not terminated, the game state is one of (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / second KT state. In the case (during the second demo display), the second demo display is terminated when a prize is entered in the second start winning opening, but the second demo display is displayed even if a prize is generated in the first start winning opening. You may not end it.

(3-1) Further, in the small hit game state when the small hit game state is controlled during the execution of the demo display (first demo display, second demo display), the start condition regarding the variation display of the normal symbol is set. When it is established (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41), the running demo display may be continued without being terminated.

(3-2) Further, in the small hit game state when the small hit game state is controlled during the execution of the demo display (first demo display, second demo display), the start condition regarding the variation display of the normal symbol is set. In response to the establishment (the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41), the running demo display may be terminated. In this case, the game state when the start condition regarding the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is satisfied (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41) is (i) a low probability / non-KT state (that is, a left-handed operation should be performed). When it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 even after the end of the small hit game state (that is, the game state in which the left-handed operation should be performed) continues. If a right-handed operation is performed), a left-handed notification may be performed.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Specific identification information variable display means (variable display of specific identification information) that can execute variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. Game control microcomputer 100) and
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) according to the game state (non-KT state, KT state). A decorative identification information variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) corresponding to either one, and
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol). ) Is controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display of the specific identification information (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A1) to (A4), the first corresponding the decorative symbol. When the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a "big hit"), a notification effect for notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4)), a combination of decorative symbols that become a big hit. (In this example, the effect of stopping and displaying "222")) is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information. When the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4), the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit". (When), the character "FEVER" is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1)), the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit is not executed. Is displayed to notify the occurrence of a big hit),
Moreover,
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is a portion set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as a jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in a normal state or a probabilistic state).
According to such a configuration, when the control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decorative identification information, the notification effect is not executed, and the specific identification information is based on the variable display of any of the specific identification information. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding whether the control is in an advantageous state. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

Further, the set value and the notification effect may be associated with each other. For example, a plurality of notification modes of the notification effect may be provided, and when the set value is 1, the execution frequency of a specific notification effect (rainbow, etc.) may be lower than when the set value is 6. By doing so, the player can infer the set value from the notification effect, and the interest is improved.

Further, a suggestion effect regarding the set value may be provided so that the execution frequency of the suggestion effect differs between the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information. By doing so, the player can pay attention to the set value and which fluctuation is executed, and the interest is improved.

Further, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decorative identification information, the suggestion effect regarding the set value may be executed. By doing so, when the notification effect for notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information is controlled in an advantageous state without executing the notification effect, the set value suggestion effect is performed instead of the execution of the notification effect. Therefore, even if the notification effect is not executed, the set value suggestion effect can be focused on, the player's discomfort can be reduced, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

Further, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied during the game, the set value suggestion effect may be performed depending on the display mode of the image display device (effect display device) or the operation mode of the movable body. For example, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (a specific type of big hit occurs, a specific number of probabilistic big hits continue, a specific type of reach effect or advance notice effect occurs, etc.), the character is displayed on the image display device, or The movable body is operated, and the display mode of the character and the operation mode of the movable body are selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like each time a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and each character is selected according to the set value. By making the selection ratio and the selection ratio of each operation mode different, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the easier it is for a specific type of character to appear when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, or , The movable body may be facilitated to operate in a specific kind of operation mode. By doing so, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied during the game, the set value suggestion effect is performed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest and reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state, an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). ) Is a controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-20, the set value is set. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the number of jackpot determination values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 and 11-18, a jackpot numerical range). Is a portion set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as a jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in a normal state or a probabilistic state). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Explanation of Feature 207SG of This Embodiment)

Next, the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 207SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, a hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right gaming area 207SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-7, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 207SG003 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. The lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. Although the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 207SG201, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Device 207SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 207SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 207SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 207SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 207SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is variably displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 207SG025A and second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 207SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-6, for example, when one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the two LEDs on the left of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 207SG332.

FIG. 11-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a set value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-9, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-10 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-10, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α, super reach β, etc. is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10, the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, and the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 that is out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-24, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) and the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 11-11 (B). Judgment table (set value 2), first special figure display result judgment table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), second special figure display result judgment table shown in FIG. 11-12 (B). (Setting value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), and the second special figure display result determination table (setting) shown in FIG. 11-13 (B). Value 3), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 11-14 (A), and the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 11-14 (B). ), The first special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), The first special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), and FIG. 11 In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -21 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

11-11 (A) to 11-16 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probable change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-12 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probable change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probable change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-14 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-14 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-16, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, FIGS. 11-11 (A), 11-12 (A), 11-13 (A), 11-14 (A), 11-15 (A), 11-16 (Fig. 11-16). As shown in A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, FIG. 11-11 (B), FIG. 11-12 (B), FIG. 11-13 (B), FIG. 11-14 (B), FIG. 11-15 (B), FIG. 11-16 ( As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. ..

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-18, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 11-19, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the hit judgment is made regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with the value 32767 as a reference as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) and 11-16 (B) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

11-21 (A) and 11-21 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 11-21 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 11-21 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-22. In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the state shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state that is advantageous to the player, and is a "big hit". The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 11-23 (A) and 11-23 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 775 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 120 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 290 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and is lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in this embodiment, when these determination values are that the type of jackpot is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of jackpot is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in the low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).
When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is determined. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common determination rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α is illustrated. The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 11-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-24 (A) to 11-24 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first is the first. The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). NS. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIGS. 11-25 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 207SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 207SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 207SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 207SG152, and a game control timer setting unit. It includes a 207SG153, a game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 207SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 207SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 207SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 207SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A). A data holding area 207SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 207SG190 shown in FIG. 11-26 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 207SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 207SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 207SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194. The reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 207SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 207SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in such a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and the hold display flag. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the buffer numbers corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage can be stored in association with each buffer number.

In the hold display flag, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored. , When the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided, "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. ) Is set, a hold storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, and the variation corresponding to the hold storage display. In the display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A shown in FIG. 11-26 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variation display of the effect symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIGS. 11-26 (B), each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

In the read-ahead notice setting process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, and the hold display flag is set. If there is an entry that has not been entered, depending on whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed based on the symbol specification command or variable category command stored corresponding to the entry. The display mode (display pattern) of the reserved storage display is determined. When it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold memory display mode is determined from the square (◇) and the star (☆), and when it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the display mode of the hold memory display is decided. Is determined to be white circle. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the hold storage display is set in the hold display flag.

After the hold display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (see FIGS. 11-52) so that the hold storage display becomes the first hold storage display area 207SG005D or the second hold storage display area. It will be displayed on 207SG005U.

The feature unit 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which a hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead notice effect that can be determined to be executed in the look-ahead notice setting process, but the present invention is limited to this. As the look-ahead notice effect, for example, a background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, an operation effect in which a movable body provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates, and the like are reserved. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the display notice effect.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-27 (B) and 11-27 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 ball in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of this embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-29, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set in is "5", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-30 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the RAM clear flag is set to 207SGSa010 without executing 207SGSa010. move on.

In the 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In the 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed). 207SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014. If the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) Proceed to 207SGSa014 without executing.

In the 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in the 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGsa023), and as shown in FIG. 11-36 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (207SGsa026; N), the processes of 207SGsa025 and 207SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (207SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in the 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (207SGSa029) and allow interrupts (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGsa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. 11-36. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of the 207SGSa032-207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 11-31 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGsa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is continued. Specify the address of 207SGSa042 and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear process ends.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, the RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) include special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in the pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol. The setting value (judgment used setting value) read out for setting the display result judgment table when the variable display result is judged in the normal processing is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" at an address other than the set value.

The feature unit 207SG in this embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flare in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 11-32 is a flowchart showing a set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa052, FIG. 11-37 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 11-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in the 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Set "1" (reset the set value to "1") and proceed to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1 ^ & is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In the 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process execution to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGsa055 and 207SGsa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa056; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. Update the content (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", "2", which is a setting value one step more advantageous to the player than the "1", is set as a temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A value one larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 207SGsa062 to 207SGsa065. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGsa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 and the value of the provisional set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. When the value of the set value and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGsa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 11-33 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa102, FIG. 11-37 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 11-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power supply disconnection detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGsa106 and 207SGsa107 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa107; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa108). The power failure detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of the lock switch 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGsa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B All segments constituting the above are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command (207SGSa115) to the effect control board 12, and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display 207SG131 are lit, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the holding display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232 blinking, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., can see the pachinko game machine 1 changing the set value or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment of lighting only the LED of No. 1 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the jackpot A and the jackpot shown in FIG. 11-6. As long as it does not correspond to either B or the jackpot C, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (A), at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is changed in set value. It may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By turning on the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value change process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 11-27) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. (Clear switch is OFF) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (A), 11-35 (B), and 11-35 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off to turn off the first power. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 11-27) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 11-34 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38, the CPU 103 executed the same power failure detection process (207SGS200) as the above-mentioned 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. Later, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-39. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (207SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (207SGS501a; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (207SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in the 207SGS502 (207SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503). ..

When the first start port switch 22A is off in the 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in the 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (207SGS501b; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (207SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in the 207SGS505 (207SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506). ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (207SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the processing of the 207SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and specified (207SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the processing of the 207SGS 509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time, and will be described later. The variable display result determination module (207SGS525) is specified to determine the variable display result.

Following the processing of the 207SGS510, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of 207SGS511, the random value determination process at the time of winning is executed (207SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (207SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of 207SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 207SGS504. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS516), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-40 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 207SGS 512 of FIG. 11-39 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 207SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 11-41) described later. The result) is set as "big hit" to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control to the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 207SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. conduct. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. Before Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-40 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the first address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 11-31 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIGS. 11-42, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. It is compared with the data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS571). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, when it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS572; N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (207SGS573), and the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in 207SGS509 of FIGS. 11-39. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the above is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the numerical data is a small hit in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined by the 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display is out of range (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 11-40 (A), it is confirmed by 207SGS575 whether or not it is determined that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526), and when it is determined that the large hit is not obtained (207SGS526; N), in the variable display in 207SGS525. If it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, if it is determined that the variable display is out of order (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "out of order". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (207SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. (207SGS528).

When it is determined by the 207SGS526 that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command in the case of jackpot A, a third symbol designation command in the case of jackpot B, and a fourth symbol designation command in the case of jackpot C. The transmission setting of the symbol specification command is executed (207SGS534), and then, as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern, a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type is selected and set (207SGS535), and the 207SGS536 is set. move on.

Further, when the 207SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

If the time reduction flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (207SGS529), and if the time reduction flag is set (207SGS528; Y). ), The deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (207SGS530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 207SG, in addition to these deviation pattern determination tables A and deviation pattern determination tables D, the deviation pattern determination used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 is determined. Table B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 11-24, the deviation pattern determination table A is used. In the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the non-reach fluctuation pattern, 1 to 450 when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the set value is 2. When the set value is 3, 1-410 is assigned, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for the non-reach variation pattern, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for dynamic pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in the 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations are determined by changing the number of reserved memories after the determination. Is always a non-reach or super-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D. ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (207SGS536). In this feature unit 207SG, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is completed.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

FIG. 11-41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is "0" (207SGS541). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of the 207SGS541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), it is set as the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "2" (207SGS544), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of the 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads out the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined by 207SGS541 that the number of reserved second special figure is "0", and whether or not the number of reserved first special figure is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of the first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in the 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), it is set as the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "1" (207SGS548), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

In the 207SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like (207SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 11-31 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 11-31 (B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (207SGS551). When it is determined that the judgment used setting value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the setting value specified by 207SGS550 is compared with the stored judgment used setting value (207SGS552), and the specified setting value is compared. It is determined whether or not the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553).

When it is determined in the 207SGS553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is issued to the effect control board 12. While making settings for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. Enter the process. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is stored in the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the current start address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the start address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing. The CPU 103 performs processing such as limiting the launch of the game ball, and not paying out the prize ball or variablely displaying the special symbol even if the game ball wins at each winning opening. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-gamable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are shown in FIGS. 11-36 ( The abnormality may be notified to a player, a clerk of a game hall, or the like by using a display mode (lighting mode) as shown in B) or FIG. 11-37 (B).

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the game is played. Although the embodiment in which the output of the security signal to the field management device is executed only once is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmission of these error specification commands and the output of the security signal are illustrated. May be repeatedly executed at predetermined period intervals in the above-mentioned incapacitated state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 207SG, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a non-gamable state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 uses the pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different and the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state, for example, the game hall. Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (this value). By setting 1) in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in 207SGS551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553. If it is determined that the used setting value is the same as the stored determination used setting value (207SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected. And set (207SGS556). After that, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in the 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 11-40 (A), that is, the processing of 207SGS571 to 207SGS557 shown in FIG. 11-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a big hit (207SGS558), and when it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a small hit. Is confirmed (207SGS559).

When the 207SGS558 determines that a big hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A) and 11-21 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "big hit A" and "big hit B" in the jackpot type determination table. , It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "big hit C" is matched (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of the 207SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", it may be set to "1", if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "2", and if it is "big hit C", it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, when the 207SGS559 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560 and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS560). ..

On the other hand, if the 207SGS559 does not determine that a small hit will occur in the variable display, that is, if the variable display does not result in a small hit (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In the 207SGS565, whether or not to control the big hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) is determined in advance, and whether or not to control the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set). In addition, a definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of the above, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" by 207SGS558, when the big hit type in 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. Set to. When the jackpot type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" by 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set in 207SGS560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit" in advance. Corresponding to the determination result, the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the fixed special symbol is set in the 207SGS565, the set value specified in the 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol is normal. End the process. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Since the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment stores the determined used setting value as one of the game information in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 11-31 (B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to cold start. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the judgment used setting is illustrated. By storing the value in the area that has not been cleared by the RAM clearing process in the RAM 102, the judgment used set value and the RAM 102 are determined when the first variable display is executed even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start. It may be possible to compare the set values (set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the first address of.

In addition, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 and 11-41, a mode in which the variable display result is determined by using the variable display result determination module that executes common processing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module is provided with a set value specified by the CPU 103 (a set value stored at the start address of the RAM 102) and a determined used set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the game stopped state when the process to be compared (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIGS. 11-41) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value. Processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since the process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state can be executed when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 11-43 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer goes out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). (Information including the number of super reach times, etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 are notified. The RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification is executed) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image in the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared. A clerk at the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 after displaying the notification image 207SG005M1) that notifies the fact, emitting the game effect lamp 9, and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to notify that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Further, when the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The set value-related notification process for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412).

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (B) and 11-50 (C), the image display device 5 is used as a notification during setting value change and notification during setting value confirmation. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. Generally, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a game hall clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of a game hall who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot determine from the display of the image display device 5 whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during setting value change and the notification during confirmation of set value, the pachinko game machine is sent to the clerk of the game hall who changes or confirms the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is activated in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the first movable body (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to do so (see Figures 11-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48. FIG. 11-47 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 11-48 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, and FIG. 11-48 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control at the time of non-detection.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect position (second position), and are provided so as to be able to reciprocate from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display and the like.

The effect control CPU 120 is movable when the detected portion of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. When the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the game island, or when the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the motor is removed. The moving body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the gaming machine due to a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as the moving body 207SG321 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed to return to the origin or cannot operate due to adjustment, failure, or catching. If it is at a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the operation control at the time of non-detection in FIGS. 11-32), the origin is returned. Execute non-detection operation control for. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the direction of the origin position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 11-48 (A) and 11-48 (B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and are the control speeds set for operating the movable bodies 207SG321. , 207SG 322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and the other moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section. Movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 when the mode is different between the moving section and other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when the moving section rises and falls even in the same moving section. The operating speed when the is actually operated may differ from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322's actual operating speeds are not always the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and size of each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are determined. When there are differences in the operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc., the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the set actual operation check process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the control speed set in the above. Specifically, control is performed so that after accelerating from the origin position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the effect position, and after accelerating from the effect position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change in the order of high speed → low speed. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of, even when the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed are higher than the minimum speed. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are controlled so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is reached. It will be described as operating.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG3211 is controlled so as to be the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when the device is stopped at the effect position. After the 207SG322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection time operation control, it is moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the feature unit 207SG in the form of Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. When operated at the control speed when accelerating, that is, at high speed, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion, or they can move from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 11-43, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. It is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value has been completed is set (207SGS415). When the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the processing of 207SGS416.

In the 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change is completed. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (207SGS420).

In the 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as the 207SGS413 Then, the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as the 207SGS414, is executed, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), the 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and when the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started. To execute. As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a set value change end notification command and a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When it is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second are performed again. The movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed. When the CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in the absence state, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is completed. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization process is not yet completed. In other words, if the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed before the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization that are being executed are completed. Only the conversion process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

If the 207SGS411 does not receive the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error designation command is received (207SGS425). .. When the error specification command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error specification command is executed, and when the error specification command is not received (207SGS425; N), the error notification process is executed. , 207 SGS 403.

As the error notification in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (D), if the image display device 5 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command. good. By displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command on the image display device 5 in this way, the player can determine that an invalid value is set as a set value from the notification image 207SG005M4. , The power was turned on again in the pachinko game machine 1 in a state where a power failure occurred while changing the set value, and the set value (judgment used set value) referred to in the previous variable display is stored in the start address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that the set value is different from the set value. In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, an error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and an error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko game machine 1 is completed. There are two error notification processes.

Of these, regarding the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the error that occurred when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (CPU 103 is processing the game control main process 207SGSa031 shown in FIG. 11-30). The pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command transmitted), and the error notification processing (207SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. The notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the error that occurred after the startup of the above is completed (the CPU 103 receives the error specification command transmitted in the processing of the special symbol normal processing 207SGS554 shown in FIGS. 11-41). Just do it.

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-44, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player information). While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since receiving the input of, from the RAM 122, the information for production (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. ) And the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing setting value information is overwritten (updated and stored).

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. There is.

Then, in the 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. Start displaying the initial symbol according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-45, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. If it is set, the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is higher than when it is set, and the decorative symbol is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a set value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIGS. 11-43, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the above. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table by executing the start notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the command received at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the presence, the mode of notification of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-46, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the output sound A is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated and the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Output of the output sound C of the above, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) for 40 seconds is executed on the image display device 5. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

The feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer of a game hall or a management device such as a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification at the time of this, a signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, a part of the device that executes the start notification is common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more pachinko machines are provided, sound is output only from some of the pachinko machines), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the game machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, the sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of is executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. , The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, set value confirmation end notification command, and set value change end notification command, even if it is received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which different combinations of decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the player is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part of them may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIGS. 11-43, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power failure detection process (207SGS432). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIGS. 11-51, the effect control CPU 120 first has an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (207SGS441). If there is no power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information, player information, etc. stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The backup data to be included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIGS. 11-43, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 11-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, the effect random number update process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number, the player information input process (207SGS436) for accepting the input of the player information, and the game. The player information output process (207SGS437) that outputs the person information, the effect information aggregation process (207SGS438) that aggregates the effect information, and the error notification process (207SGS439) are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. In addition, the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server, thereby performing the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as the effect information each time the variable display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. do.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received from the CPU 103. If an error designation command has been received, error notification is executed according to the received error designation command.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-52, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), it is displayed in the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161). The hold display update process (207SGS454) for updating the number of hold storage displays and the display mode of the hold storage display according to the number of hold storages stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A and the value of the hold display flag is executed. , One of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), the hold display update process (207SGS454) is executed and S170 is executed according to the effect control process flag. When any of the processes of ~ S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is decremented by -1 (207SGS453). The hold display update process (207SGS454) is executed, and any of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processes of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 207SG in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the pachinko game machine 1 is variablely displayed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated throughout, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays based on the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game has become possible, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game are set as settings related to the progress of the game. The amount of light of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set as the state at the time of shipment from the factory.

Further, the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the hold display advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, an effect of displaying a specific background image on the image display device 5, an effect of operating a specific movable body, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, an effect of emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, in the display result determination table, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Regardless of the above, the range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the set value is set according to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set with the hit determination value 1020 as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where the random value is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value is obtained regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Is whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the second special figure display result is different. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself uses 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When determining whether or not the random value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). While reading the set value, set the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value (set the display result judgment table according to the set value), and enter the jackpot game state. It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read set value. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. .. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time and the judgment used setting value do not match as the comparison result, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5 (see FIGS. 11-50), it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading an inappropriate set value. can. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the gaming machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, a mode of comparing the set value stored in the RAM 102 with the determined used set value each time the variable display is executed has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determined used set value as the comparison result, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the determination of an inappropriate variable display result from being performed by reading.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 to 11-42, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module common to both when the winning random number value determination is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, a small hit is made regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the determination value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (to the set value read from the RAM 102). Since the display result determination table is set according to the situation), the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced. Further, as in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is standardized. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, so if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, a mode in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

The embodiment also includes the invention 207SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to suitably notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 207SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
When it is in the set state, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the set state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting means is used. The state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process shown in FIGS. 11-33).
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display recognizable as the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified in the information display unit where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed, and thus it is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 207SG,
The display recognizable as the set state or the confirmed state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-37). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed. Different part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in a set state or a confirmed state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 207SG,
In the set state or the confirmed state, the variable display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state or the confirmed state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). The part that lights all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the variable display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display recognizable as the set state or the confirmation state, a display is performed in which all of the small display units are lit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). The part that lights all the constituent segments)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 6 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a gaming medium into a gaming area (for example, left gaming area 207SG002L and right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game.
The information display unit includes a launch direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the launch direction of the game medium in the game area.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect, the launch direction notification unit makes a display recognizable that the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (A)). The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed by the launch direction notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 7 of the invention 207SG,
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) that can store information related to the variable display as hold information.
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, a display recognizable as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (A)). A part that blinks all the segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the hold display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing into a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state is provided.
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (A)). Of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 in the value change state or set value confirmation state, only one segment is lit)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed by the number-of-times notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage means (for example, the area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) that can store the state information (for example, the RAM clear flag) that can specify the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means, and
With
The game control means
The first condition (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) is satisfied. At this time, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasing the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 11-31 (A)) is performed. Feasible and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) are satisfied, the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial stage to be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The initialization process common to the conversion process can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, the part where the RAM clear process and the set value change process can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process. Not part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the initialization process can be standardized when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

The embodiment also includes the invention 208SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to preferably leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the set state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 208SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIGS. 11-32).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (B)). If an error occurs in excess of the set value, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display area in which a variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed. Since it is notified by the display that it has been done, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 208SG,
A gaming machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or greater than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is described. It is possible to preferably notify that an error regarding the storage area in which is stored occurs and that the set value needs to be reset.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored has occurred at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if the error is not present, a display that can identify the occurrence of an error is performed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power failure during the setting change is restored as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), the first display is performed. A part that blinks all the segments constituting the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value because a power failure occurs before the set value is confirmed without setting a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that the above is true.

The embodiment also includes the invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game value to be given, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming a set value are used. There is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if the above are provided individually. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 209SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine that can play a game using a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value adding means (for example, the base shown in FIGS. 11-27 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Therefore, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to provide them individually, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can identify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which at least the set value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (B)). When a setting value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 11-35 (A) and 11-36 (B)). As shown in the above, in both the case of displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and the case of displaying the occurrence of an abnormal error, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display A game machine characterized by (a part using part 207SG029D) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which a set value is stored, and also to notify the set value information. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be independently lit (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are each eight. Part composed of 10 segments),
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on.
The information display means constitutes each display unit when the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, the clear switch is ON). All the display units are lit in the fully lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit are displayed. The part that repeats (blinks) all lighting and all extinguishing of all segments that make up the 207SG029D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 209SG,
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example,). As shown in FIG. 11-32, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after the execution of the 207SGSa015 and the 207SGSa016, the 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm the set value.

The embodiment of this embodiment also includes the invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on an operation of changing a set value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is changed, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirmation operation again after the operation of changing the set value is completed. In this case, when the operation of changing the set value is completed during the first confirmation operation of the movable body, the change operation is completed. There is a problem that the confirmation operation of the new movable body is started from the timing of the movement, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting state shifts to a setting state in which the set value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30, a clear switch and a lock switch are used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process).
The control means
When the confirmation operation control for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) is shifted to the set state and the above. It can be executed when the setting state is completed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-49, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command, it is actually executed. Operation confirmation The actual operation starts from the part where the first movable body initialization process including the operation control and the second movable body initialization process are executed in order, and the timing when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control are executed in order),
If the setting state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the setting state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 11-32). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30, it is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally. It can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state is completed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-49, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command and a setting value confirmation. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the part that executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control in order, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the transition to the confirmation state is performed, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the confirmation state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, the return operation control (for example, operation control at the time of non-detection) for causing the return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. It is feasible and can be executed before the control is executed.
When the set state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation ends (for example, a first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process). In the part where the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed after the non-detection self-operation control is completed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the set state or the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the set state or the confirmation state is terminated when the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), the first movable unit is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the body initialization process is not executed) On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control by the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is executed (for example, FIG. 11-). As shown in 49 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command by the effect control CPU 120 is completed, and the second movable body initialization is completed. If a setting value change notification command or a setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly completed after the completion of the second movable body initialization process. And the part that executes in order)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 210SG,
With the plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first face-to-face initialization process and the second movable body initialization process).
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. The confirmation operation control due to the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of, the first one is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the set state or the confirmation state has ended. The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process based on the above is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is performed. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in order after the end of
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Although the feature portion 207SG in this embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is used as the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the like. Although the embodiment including the design display 207SG020, the general drawing hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B even if they are not included.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state). Although an embodiment in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. It is possible to inform the existence in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on, thereby making the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. 1 The display mode (lighting mode) of the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value changing state and the set value confirmation state. If the display mode is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol It is not necessary to light some of the segments constituting the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all segments and the round display 207SG131 constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. An embodiment of lighting of one segment, blinking of all segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. For blinking of all segments to be performed, it may not be executed or only a part of the blinking may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and unless it is a combination corresponding to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 11-6, the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is a plurality. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited, and for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or a temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the embodiment for determining whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is determined. It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An example of a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, but is limited to the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can be notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An example of a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during the game" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. As a process, a mode of executing the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. , Actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An embodiment has been exemplified in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited thereto. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator A description indicating that the 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are lit or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk or the like of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical value of the small hit determination value) regardless of the gaming state and the set value. The range) is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 11-53 (A) and 11-53 (B) are modified examples. As shown in the above, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the gaming state and the set value.

When the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 11-53 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is 1024 to 1237. Is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value for the small hit determination value) so that the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

When the game state is the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 11-53 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit judgment is made. The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increases from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Set to (reference value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

Further, as a form in which the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are set to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIGS. 11-54, The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is changed according to the set value. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIGS. 11-54, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number value MR1. Is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIGS. 11-54, 64990 for the set value 1, 64974 for the set value 2, and 64954 for the set value 3). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value, it is further variable by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than 65208, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It suffices to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit and the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 11-53 and 11-54, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value). Common numerical range of common numerical range and small hit judgment value, when 2 to 6 are set as set values for pachinko game machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value, non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the big hit judgment regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, so that the large hit game state or the small hit game state It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined that the control is performed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is determined by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value in the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hit game state, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the big hit game state and the determination whether to control to the small hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing the above.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-53, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the increased jackpot determination value. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range of, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state within the numerical range in which the number of the jackpot determination values has increased, and the small hit gaming state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Further, also in the modes shown in FIGS. 11-53 and 11-54, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-53 and 11-54, the form in which the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit judgment value is illustrated. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in 11-55 and FIG. 11-56, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

When the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The non-common numerical range (judgment included in the non-common numerical range) when the small hit judgment value common numerical range) is different from the big hit judgment value common numerical range and the big hit judgment value setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the largest number of values), a continuous numerical range from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 11-55, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 11-56, in any case. The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the fluctuation special figure, but the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Although the forms in which the numbers are different are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. May be the same as.

As described above, in the modes shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. There is. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value). In the range, the range corresponding to the set value with 60000 as the reference value (60,000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for the set value 6) is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change of the set value. Therefore, the development of the pachinko gaming machine related to the set value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control the big hit game state and determining whether or not to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103.

In particular, since the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value to the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine the jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, as in the above-mentioned feature unit 207SG, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is the common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state of the CPU 103.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, while the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value for the machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it corresponds to each set value. Although the embodiment in which the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value is not set. A common numerical range may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the reference is the same as in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56. The range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included differs depending on the variation special map, the CPU 103 has the variation special map. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure, as a reference value, it is possible to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to use it.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-55 and 11-56, the form in which the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or is not common. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state is determined based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state is illustrated based on the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is in the big hit gaming state by a method other than that shown in the feature unit 207SG. It may be determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1 and it may be determined whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and a big hit game state or a small hit game is performed based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

(Explanation of feature 10F)
Next, the feature portion 10F will be described. The feature unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 12-1, the same processes as those in FIGS. 11-32 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa051). After that, a process similar to the process shown in FIGS. 11-32 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). After that, a process similar to the process shown in FIGS. 11-32 is executed.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 12-2, the same processing as in FIGS. 11-33 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 12-1. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa101). After that, the same process as that shown in FIGS. 11-33 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 12-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 ends (207SGSa112). After that, the same process as that shown in FIGS. 11-33 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers clock the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops the timing of these plurality of timers when the game is stopped. These plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the large winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the big winning door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V-cover opening time timer is a predetermined switch (in a V-probability game machine that controls the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer provided in front of the sensor for detecting V probability change) for measuring the opening time of the V lid controlled by the open state and the closed state. In the V-probability gaming machine, the V-cover is opened in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. The area where the V-cover is open is called the V-winning area. The CPU 103 uses a V-cover opening time timer to measure the time from when the V-cover is opened to when it is closed. The V-passing waiting time timer is a timer for timing the V-winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed from the open state (winning in the large winning opening just before the closing of the large winning opening door). A game ball that has passed the switch) is also judged to be a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the validity period of the V prize, which is determined to be valid by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B by the electric chew opening time timer. ..

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The normal figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses a fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending effect, which is the period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

As other timers other than the above-mentioned timers, the CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer. The normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol by the timer for the normal symbol fluctuation stop period.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is operating in the game stop start process (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not running (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is running (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the V-cover opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the electric chew open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the electric chew open time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015; Y), the operating special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS015; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the operating normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is operating (10FS018; Y), the operating ending time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not operating (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is operating (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timer is not running (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing to invalidate the payout of prize balls. Due to the other processing (10FS021), various processings are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing the game stop end processing in the feature unit 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-cover opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V-cover opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V-passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS030, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether or not the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timer is stopped (10FS039; Y), the other timer that is stopped is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the other timer is not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, and a process for enabling the detection of various errors. It includes processing to enable the payout of prize balls. By the other processing (10FS041), various processings are enabled and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 is the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timekeeping of the inter-round interval period timer period is restarted based on the end. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the interval period between rounds in the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the time counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the validity period of the V prize is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and the valid period of the electric chew open time timer. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the timing of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timekeeping of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the fanfare effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The time counting of the period of the variable stop period timer is stopped, and the time counting of the period of the special figure variable stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes or additions within the range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will have. included. A modified example of the feature portion 10F will be described below.

We have described a gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols, but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a game ball winning (V-winning) in the special winning slot (V winning slot), and first-class and second-class gaming machines. It may be applied to a gaming machine (a type / two type mixer) in which the above is combined. When the start winning prize to the second starting winning opening is detected, the big hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result is obtained. Game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. It is controlled to the state, and the special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is accepted by the special variable winning ball device for small hits in the small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, the variable for big hits is made. The second-class jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

In such a type 1 type 2 mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided to measure the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V region) is effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is also determined to be a winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small hit time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is completed. , The timekeeping of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the small hit game state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed for the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, even if the same control is executed even in the setting change state. good. For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of various timers based on being controlled to the setting change state when the player is in a favorable state, and the various timers are based on the end of the setting change state. You may want to restart the timekeeping.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol results in a jackpot display result or a missed display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in an incorrect display result, the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. .. In this way, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player for the jackpot display result which is advantageous for the player, but the timer is not disadvantageous to the player for the off display result. It can be prevented from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a jackpot display result or a missed display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the out-of-order display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer during the execution of the out-of-order variable display. Occasionally, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or unfavorable to the player. For example, when the setting value is favorable to the player, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the various timers are stopped. You may not stop.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 10F)
As described above, the feature section 10F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature section 10F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 11F)
The following inventions may be included as the feature portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
p. The normal variable winning means is stopped for a period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in a state where it can enter, and the setting confirmation state is completed. The timekeeping of the period is restarted based on the above (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and the validity period of the electric chew open time timer is activated. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the feature portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
It is further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that measures with a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) for measuring the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Figure Stops the timing of the fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to proceed with the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 13F)
The following invention may be included as the feature portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. rice field. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived. ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
It is further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that measures with a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) for measuring the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Figure Stops the timing of the fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to proceed with the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into the predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. The timekeeping of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of feature 40F)
Next, the feature unit 40F will be described. The feature unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise due to static electricity or the like may occur during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 13-1 is a diagram illustrating an effect control command in the feature unit 40F in this embodiment. In FIG. 13-1, some effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) described above. The commands added are command F1XXH and command F2XXXH. These commands are effect control commands that indicate the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) in which the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value among the determination results at the time of winning.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 13-1 are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at predetermined timings by the CPU 103. Upon receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on the fluctuation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command to display the variation of the displayed decorative pattern. Further, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constantly small symbol in a reduced form of the decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command to constantly display the variation of the small symbol to be displayed.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As a symbol for variable display, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the normal symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is fluctuating, and is fluctuated by a constant operation in a manner that is always visible in a display device such as an image display device 5. Is displayed. By displaying the fourth symbol in a variable manner, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body displays all or a part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a shielding effect is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

(About processing based on the designated command while the big winning opening is open)
During the jackpot game, a round game that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 into an open state (first state) that is advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to win the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the command designated during the opening of the big winning opening.

(About the processing based on the 1st start opening prize designation command and the 2nd start opening prize designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start port winning designation command, so that the first hold information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 is stored. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second start opening winning designation command, and is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About processing based on the symbol specification command and variation type specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 performs a flash effect at the time of winning and a hold change effect at the time of winning based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. The flash effect at the time of winning is an effect of emitting a lamp provided around the first starting port when a starting winning is generated. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for a flash effect at the time of winning based on the jackpot expectation degree based on the hold information by the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the lamps emit light in different modes depending on the degree of expectation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 emits red light when the jackpot expectation is high, and white light when the expectation is not so high. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the flash effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that control may be made so that sound is not output only by light emission.

The hold change effect at the time of winning is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning is generated to a mode different from the usual one. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for the hold change effect at the time of winning based on the jackpot expectation degree based on the hold information by the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest expectation of big hit, and the hold display is displayed in white in the normal mode in the case of losing the lottery or the deviation fluctuation without reach. .. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the hold change effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that the control may be performed so that the sound is not output only by the pending change.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to emit light based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command to execute the pending change effect at the time of winning. It should be noted that only one of the flash effect at the time of winning and the pending change effect at the time of winning may be executed. Further, at the time of winning a prize, an effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by the output of the sound.

Next, the effect control main process executed in the feature unit 40F will be described. FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the feature unit 40F. In FIG. 13-2, the same processing as in FIGS. 11-43 is designated by the same reference numerals and a part of description thereof will be omitted. In FIG. 13-2, the processes related to 207SGS413 to 207SGS415 and 207SGS417 to 207SGS424 in FIGS. 11-43 are deleted, and the sub-side game stop process is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The set value-related notification process for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412). In the set value-related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value-related notification process in the 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-3.

After the sub-side game stop process is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412 and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS427.

FIG. 13-3 is a flowchart showing a sub-side game stop process in the feature unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 displays the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation pattern specification command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. If it is determined that the variation pattern specification command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 controls to display the variation of the decorative symbol or constantly display the variation of the small symbol by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Can be prevented from executing. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is received. If it is determined that the designated command has not been received while the large winning opening is open, the process proceeds to 40FS014. If it is determined that the designated command is received while the large winning opening is open, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the command for opening the big winning opening while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. You can prevent it from running. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the lamp to emit light by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the image display device 5 from executing the winning hold change effect by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command has been received. If it is determined that the variation type specification command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the lamp to emit light by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the effect control board 12 from a device that sends a command for confirming the state of the screen or the state of the accessory provided in the gaming machine at the time of shipment from the factory. .. When transmitting a test command, various test commands are transmitted with a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command has been received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is determined by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the process based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 13-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the process ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). By discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect. After that, the process ends.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if it receives the variation pattern specification command, it discards the variation pattern specification command. Do not perform receive-based control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not perform receive-based control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command while being controlled to the setting change state, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if it receives the special winning opening opening designation command, it discards the large winning opening opening designated command. The control based on the reception of the specified command while the big winning opening is open is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if it receives the special winning opening opening designation command, it discards the large winning opening opening designated command. The control based on the reception of the specified command while the big winning opening is open is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command while being controlled to the setting change state, the first start winning entry is won. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, the first start winning entry is won. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when controlled to the setting change state, and is based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. Do not perform control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received while the setting is being changed, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as a winning lamp or an image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when controlled in the setting confirmation state, and is based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. Do not perform control. By doing so, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command such as 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting to display the image notifying that the setting is in the setting change state is set, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Based on, set to display an image notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state. In this way, it can be shown that the control is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like It is possible to prevent the predetermined production means of the above from malfunctioning.

As shown in 40FS020 of FIG. 13-3, the control according to the test command is executed even when the setting is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In this way, even when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command can be executed.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes or additions within the range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will have. included. A modified example of the feature portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the effect control command reception buffer for each command to be transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of analyzing the commands in order and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the initialization command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, even if an effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or setting confirmation is received, the process based on the effect control command is not executed. explained. However, the process based on the reception of the effect control command while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be executed internally. Even in such a case, the control executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on receiving other effect control commands. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is displayed in appearance. Regarding the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the channels other than the channel that outputs the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed. However, when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, even if a command is received, it may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning have been described as a predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, an operating means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the gaming machine may be used as a predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operating means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, the command for executing these operations is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even if it is executed, the control for discarding the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than a command for terminating the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It may be controlled not to.

In the above-described embodiment, the lamp provided in the gaming machine may be made to emit light or sound may be output from the speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that these effect means do not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the advance notice effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type command is executed has been described. However, the advance notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when a command related to the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of a start winning prize, the command related to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted. The advance notice effect may be executed based on the above. In such a case, even if a command related to the fluctuation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, the lottery for the advance notice to be executed may be executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command or the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various notices may not be executed by determining that the notice cannot be executed at the timing of actually determining whether or not the notice can be executed. In addition, when executing the look-ahead notice effect in the continuous fluctuation display other than the time of winning, the lottery of the notice is executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the fluctuation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends at the timing when the notice is actually started, the notice based on the received command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to restrict the reception of another irregular command thereafter. good.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means capable of setting a setting value regarding the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A setting permission control means that can control the setting permission state for permitting the setting of the setting value, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting permission state, and
A setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation control means.
An interrupt process execution means that executes an interrupt process that can execute a game-related process,
An ordinary variable display means that variably displays the ordinary identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area and derives and displays the display result.
Ordinary variable display timekeeping means for measuring the ordinary variable display period, which performs variable display of ordinary identification information,
A special variable display means that can display the variable display result by variable display of the special identification information,
Special variable display timekeeping means for timing the special variable display period for variable display of special identification information,
It is equipped with an external output means that can output a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine.
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing is permitted.
When the setting confirmation state ends, the interrupt process is permitted, and after the interrupt process is permitted, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped when the normal variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped when the special variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is changed. The time measurement of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the special variable display period is restarted.
When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the mode of the special variable display means is different from the variable display result.
The external output means
It is capable of outputting the specific signal when it is controlled to the setting confirmation state,
The specific signal can be output when controlled to the setting permission state, and the specific signal can be output.
The specific information is deleted based on the end of the control of the setting permission state.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without ending the control of the setting permission state.
An error notification means capable of executing error notification based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed is provided.
The error notification means notifies the error when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means and is not controlled to the setting permission state when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Is feasible and
When the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the error notification is not executed when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means and is controlled to the setting permission state.
The external output means can output the specific signal when the error notification is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images